Barnes' Notes on the Bible · Daniel 第7章

註釋閱讀最佳化

分章註釋

Daniel 第 7 章

서론

Daniel 7 Introduction

開啟正文

第一節 本章分析

本章記載但以理在伯沙撒在位元年所做的一個值得注意的預言性之夢,以及這夢的講解。在簡述本章內容之後,為使解說更為清晰,適宜先陳明歷來為解釋本章所提出的各種方法,或對其應用所採納的不同見解。本章包含以下要點:異象(Daniel 7:1-14);以及異象的解釋(Daniel 7:15-28)。

一、異象(Daniel 7:1-14)。這夢發生於伯沙撒在位元年,並且隨即被記錄下來。但以理被描述為站在海邊,狂風在大海上吼叫,使海浪翻騰大作。忽然間,他看見四個怪獸從翻騰的波浪中上來,每一個似乎停留片刻,隨即消失。第一個獸,整體形狀像獅子,卻有鷹的翅膀。但以理注視著牠,直到翅膀被拔去,獸從地上得立起來,用兩腳站立,像人一樣,又得了人心。

關於這獸其後如何,經文並沒有說。接著出現第二個獸,形狀像熊,旁跨而坐,口中啣著三根肋骨,有吩咐這獸的說:起來吞吃多肉。關於這獸後來的結局,也沒有進一步的記載。此後又有一獸如豹,有四個翅膀、四個頭,這獸得了廣大的權柄。關於這獸如何,同樣沒有提及。其後又興起第四個獸,更為可畏。牠的形狀沒有描述,但牠兇猛而強壯,有大鐵牙,吞吃嚼碎,把面前的一切踐踏在地。這獸起初有十角,但不久其中又長起另一個角——起初較小,然而隨著牠增大,十角中有三角連根被拔出來——似乎或是被這角所拔,或是為要給牠讓位。更為奇特的是,這小角有眼,像人的眼——象徵智慧與儆醒;又有口,說誇大的話——顯出驕傲與狂妄。但以理觀看這奇異的異象,直到有寶座設立,亙古常在者坐上寶座——直到舊的統治形態終止,神的統治被引入並建立。他觀看下去,直到那獸因「小角所說」誇大的話被殺,身體損壞,扔在火中焚燒。其間,其餘的獸權柄都被奪去,生命卻仍存留片刻。隨後在異象中有一位形狀像人子的出現,來到亙古常在者面前,得了統管萬民的權柄,和一個永不敗壞的國。

二、異象的解釋(Daniel 7:15-28)。但以理因所見的異象大為愁煩,就近一位侍立者,問他這一切的真情(Daniel 7:15-16)。他所領受的講解,大致如下:他所見的那四個獸,代表將要在世上興起的四王或四國;而這異象的重大宗旨,在於陳明至高者的聖民終必得國,並要永遠掌權(Daniel 7:17-18)。這異象的重大目的,是要描繪歷代王朝的更迭,以及每一個王朝特有的品格,直到世界的統治權落入神子民的手中,直到地上的實際統治權掌握在義人手中。萬般變革所趨向的終極目標、也就是異象所要指明的事,乃是聖民最終要在地上掌權。將有這樣一個時候,天下的國權要賜給至高者的聖民;換言之,地上將出現一種光景,那時「一切掌權的」、或說一切「掌權者」(Daniel 7:27 邊註)都必事奉並順從他。關於異象所展望的終局,以及前三個獸所代表的前三國,這一般的宣告已使但以理滿意;但對於那結構如此奇特、與其餘眾獸截然不同、又經歷如此驚人轉變的第四個獸究竟代表甚麼,他仍感困惑(Daniel 7:19-22)。關於第四個獸所代表之事,向他陳明的要點總括如下:

(1) 這是代表將要在地上興起的第四個國或王朝,在多方面與之前三國不同。這國將以壓迫性的征服著稱。牠必吞吃全地,並且擊碎、打倒、踐踏所侵入之地。這描述所刻畫的,是一個嚴酷、強大、殘忍而得勝的政權;牠轄制被征服的列國,靠的是兵器的威嚇,而非公義法律的施行(Daniel 7:23)。

(2) 但以理看見從這獸頭上長出的十角,代表將要興起的十王,或相繼執掌這國權柄的眾統治者(Daniel 7:24)。

(3) 在十角之中、其後長起來的另一角,代表將要興起的另一個王朝,而這王朝將有獨特的特徵。牠與前者有某種關連,因為牠是從其中長出來的;但在最緊要的各方面,牠與前者不同。其特徵可總括如下:

(a) 牠必從他們中間興起,或以某種方式附屬於他們、與他們相連——正如角從獸的頭上長出來一樣——這恰當地表明,這新權勢以某種方式出自第四個獸所代表的王朝,正如角從那獸的頭上長出來一樣;

(b) 牠雖從其中長出,卻必與那國「不同」;其品格不由其出身這單一事實決定,而由別的因素決定。

(c) 牠必「制伏三王」;就是說,牠必勝過並傾覆十角所代表之權柄與國度的一部分——或許意指牠必篡奪第四個獸所代表之國約三分之一的權勢。

(d) 牠必以驕傲狂妄為特徵,以致其宣稱按公平的詮釋可謂是「向至高者說誇大的話」。

(e) 牠必「折磨至高者的聖民」——顯然是指逼迫。

(f) 牠必主張立法的權柄,以至於想「改變節期和律法」——顯然指某種凌駕於既定法律之上的主張,或異乎尋常的權柄(Daniel 7:24-25)。

(4) 這一切都必交在這新權勢手中「一載、二載、半載」;這暗示牠必不長存,終必完結(Daniel 7:25)。

(5) 其後必有審判——對這新權勢的司法判決——牠的權柄必被奪去,徹底滅絕(Daniel 7:26)。

(6) 將有一個時候,全地的統治權要交在聖民手中;換言之,真理與公義的原則將普遍掌權(Daniel 7:27)。

在本章的結語中(Daniel 7:28),但以理說,這些啟示深深影響了他的心。他蒙准遠眺未來,默想人類歷史進程中將發生的巨大變遷,甚至前瞻一個萬國都歸入神律法之下、至高者的朋友們得享一切權柄的時代。這樣的事必然使人心充滿莊嚴的思緒,他以深切的情感默想這些事,也就不足為奇了。

第二節 解釋本章的各種方法

歷來解釋本章的方法大相逕庭,而註釋家對其正確解釋的看法也遠非一致,這幾乎無須贅言。在進入解說之前,先提述其中一些方法,使它們在思考本章時得以呈現於心目中,或有益處。我們若考查這些方法中是否有一個與聖經作者所用語言的公平詮釋相符,就能更確切地辨明何為真正的解釋。歷來的見解可歸納為以下幾類:

一、Hardt 認為這裏的四獸代表四位特定的王——尼布甲尼撒、以未米羅達、伯沙撒和古列。

二、Ephraem(Eichhorn 從其說)認為第一獸指巴比倫—迦勒底王國;第二獸指居亞克薩列斯二世(Cyaxares II)治下的瑪代帝國,其三根「肋骨」代表該帝國的瑪代、波斯和迦勒底三部分;第三獸指波斯帝國,其四個頭和四個翅膀代表波斯帝國向天上四方、即世界各地擴張;第四獸指亞歷山大及其後繼者治下的希臘帝國,其十角代表亞歷山大後繼者中十位傑出的王,而他們中間長起的「小角」則指安提阿古·伊皮法尼斯(Antiochus Epiphanes)。按照 Ephraem 和 Eichhorn 的見解,隨後的局面指彌賽亞的國度。

三、Grotius 代表另一類註釋家(Hetzel 從其說),認為這裏所指諸國的更迭是:巴比倫—迦勒底;波斯;亞歷山大及其後繼者的國。第五國是羅馬帝國。

四、教會中流傳最廣的解釋,是認為第一獸代表迦勒底王國;第二獸代表瑪代—波斯;第三獸代表亞歷山大及其後繼者治下的希臘帝國;第四獸代表羅馬帝國。聖民得國則指彌賽亞及其律法的統治。但這見解——尤其論到這些國中的第四國和第五國時——已有過許多變體,特別是關於十角和那在其中長起之小角的含義。有些人在第五國之下看見基督的統治,認為第四國指該撒們治下的羅馬,十角指相繼而出的十位攝政王,而小角指猶流·該撒(Julius Caesar)。另一些人把最後的帝國理解為基督在地上親自的統治和祂所要建立的國,認為十角指從羅馬權勢中興起的十王或十個王朝——或是相繼的眾皇帝,或是北方蠻族入侵之後繼起的人們,或是羅馬權勢傾覆後繼承它的歐洲某些王國;至於小角,他們認為所指的或是擁有各個支派的土耳其權勢,或是穆罕默德,或是教皇權,或是敵基督。

五、猶太人普遍認為第五國指彌賽亞的統治;但在這預言各具體部分的應用上,他們中間的見解也極為分歧。他們中許多較早的註釋家認為,十角代表羅馬的十位該撒,而最後的角指提多·維斯帕先(Titus Vespasian)。後期猶太註釋家大多把這預言應用於他們傳說中的歌革和瑪各。

六、另一種也有人主張的解釋,認為第一國是迦勒底;第二國是波斯;第三國是亞歷山大的國;第四國是他後繼者的國;第五國是起來把猶太民族從敘利亞諸王專制統治之下拯救出來的哈斯摩尼(Asmonean)諸王。

七、作為教會中某一解釋方式曾流行一時的實例,可以提出 Cocceius 的見解。他認為,那有鷹翅膀的第一獸代表羅馬的基督徒皇帝的統治,以及在他們之下基督教向東西方遙遠地區的傳播;那口啣三根肋骨的第二獸代表屬亞流派的哥特人、汪達爾人和倫巴底人;那有四個頭和四個翅膀的第三獸代表擁有四大哈里發國的伊斯蘭王國;第四獸代表查理曼(Charlemagne)的國,這國中的十角代表加洛林(Carlovingians)、撒克遜、薩勒(Salle)、瑞典、荷蘭、英格蘭等的君主、王朝或民族;而小角則指實際的敵基督——教皇權。

這些不同見解和解釋方法的陳述,我譯自 Bertholdt 的《Daniel》,頁419-426。此外還當加上 Bertholdt 自己所持、也曾為許多人接受、並由 Bertholdt 在頁426-446詳細闡明和辯護的見解。那見解的要義是:第一國是尼布甲尼撒治下的巴比倫國,第一獸的翅膀代表那帝國遼闊的擴展。那有三根「肋骨」或獠牙的第二獸,代表同在一個權杖——波斯的權杖——之下建立的瑪代、呂底亞和巴比倫諸國。那有四個翅膀和四個頭的第三獸,代表亞歷山大治下的希臘王朝,以及那國向世界四方的擴張。第四獸代表多利買王朝(Lagidae)和西流基王朝(Seleucidae),希伯來人在他們手下受苦極深。關於這國的陳述(Daniel 7:7),說牠「與前三獸大不相同」,乃是指「第四國的複合性」,即牠是由許多別國組成之集合體這一事實——一個集合意義上的國。那「十角」代表那國中相繼的十位君王或王,Bertholdt 按以下次序列舉他們:

  1. 西流基·尼加鐸(Seleucus Nicator);

  2. 安提阿古·梭特(Antiochus Soter);

  3. 安提阿古·提奧斯(Antiochus Theos);

  4. 西流基·加利尼古(Seleucus Kallinicus);

  5. 西流基·克勞努(Seleucus Keraunus);

  6. 安提阿古大帝(Antiochus the Great);

  7. 西流基·非羅帕特(Seleucus Philopater);

  8. 希利奧多魯(Heliodorus);

  9. 多利買·非羅米特(Ptolemy Philometer);

  10. 底米特里(Demetrius)。

那由小角代表的第十一位,就是給希伯來民族帶來如此多災禍的安提阿古·伊皮法尼斯。按照 Bertholdt 的說法,他的統治持續了「一載、二載、半載」——即三年半;此後國度便歸還給神的子民,成為永存的統治,並最終在彌賽亞之下充滿世界,存到末時。

這樣陳述的解釋——即設「小角」指安提阿古·伊皮法尼斯——也為 Stuart 教授所主張,見《Hints on Prophecy》,第二版,頁85-98。並比較其《Commentary on Daniel》,頁173-194及205-211。

在如此紛紜的眾見解之中,要對本章的意義得到任何滿意的結論,惟一的盼望乃是仔細查考經文,並公平地探究但以理所用表號的確切含義。

英文原文

Section I.-- Analysis of the Chapter

This chapter contains an account of a remarkable prophetic dream which Daniel had in the first year of the reign of Belshazzar, and of the interpretation of the dream. After a brief statement of the contents of the chapter, it will be proper, in order to its more clear exposition, to state the different methods which have been proposed for interpreting it, or the different views of its application which have been adopted. The chapter comprises the following main points: the vision, Daniel 7:1-14; and the explanation, Daniel 7:15-28.

I. The vision, Daniel 7:1-14. The dream occurred in the first year of the reign of Belshazzar, and was immediately written out. Daniel is represented as standing near the sea, and a violent wind rages upon the sea, tossing the waves in wild commotion. Suddenly he sees four monsters emerge from the agitated waves, each one apparently remaining for a little time, and then disappearing. The first, in its general form, resembled a lion, but had wings like an eagle. On this he attentively gazed, until the wings were plucked away, and the beast was made to stand upright as a man, and the heart of a man was given to it.

Nothing is said as to what became of the beast after this. Then there appeared a second beast, resembling a bear, raising itself up on one side, and having three ribs in its mouth, and a command was given to it to arise and devour much flesh. Nothing is said further of what became of this beast. Then there arose another beast like a leopard, with four wings, and four heads, and to this beast was given wide dominion. Nothing is said as to what became of this animal. Then there arose a fourth beast more remarkable still. Its form is not mentioned, but it was fierce and strong. It had great iron teeth. It trampled down everything before it, and devoured and brake in pieces. This beast had at first ten horns, but soon there sprang up in the midst of them another - a smaller horn at first, but as this increased three of the ten horns were plucked up by the roots - apparently either by this, or in order to give place to it. What was more remarkable still, in this smaller horn there appeared the eyes of a man - emblematic of intelligence and vigilance; and a mouth speaking great things - indicative of pride and arrogance. Daniel looked on this singular vision until a throne was set up or established, and then the Ancient of days did sit - until the old forms of dominations ceased, and the reign of God was introduced and established. He contemplated it until, on account of the great words which the "horn spake," the beast was slain, and his body was destroyed, and given to the burning flame. In the meantime the dominion was taken away from the other beasts; though their existence was prolonged for a little time. Then appeared in vision one in the form of man, who came to the Ancient of days, and there was given to him universal dominion over all people a kingdom that should never be destroyed.

II. The interpretation of the vision Daniel 7:15-28. Daniel was greatly troubled at the vision which he had seen, and he approached one who stood near, and asked him the meaning of it, Daniel 7:15-16. The explanation with which he was favored was, in general, the following: That those four beasts which he had seen represented four kings or kingdoms which would exist on the earth, and that the great design of the vision was to state the fact that the saints of tho Most High would ultimately possess the kingdom, and would reign forever, Daniel 7:17-18. The grand purpose of the vision was to represent the succession of dynasties, and the particular character of each one, until the government over the world should pass into the hands of the people of God, or until the actual rule on the earth should be in the hands of the righteous. The ultimate object, the thing to which all revolutions tended, and which was designed to be indicated in the vision, was the final reign of the saints on the earth. There was to be a time when the kingdom under the whole heaven was to be given to the people of the saints of the Most High; or, in other words, there would be a state of things on the earth, when "all dominions," or all "rulers" (margin, Daniel 7:27), would obey him. This general announcement in reference to the ultimate thing contemplated, and to the three first kingdoms, represented by the three first beasts, was satisfactory to Daniel, but he was still perplexed in regard to the particular thing designed to be represented by the fourth beast, so remarkable in its structure, so unlike all the others, and undergoing so surprising a transformation, Daniel 7:19-22. The sum of what was stated to him, in regard to the events represented by the fourth beast, is as follows:

(1) That this was designed to represent a fourth kingdom or dynasty which would arise upon the earth, in many respects, different from the three which would precede it. It was to be a kingdom which would be distinguished for oppressive conquests. It would subdue the whole earth, and it would crush, and prostrate, and trample down those whom it invaded. The description would characterize a dominion that would be stern, and mighty, and cruel, and successful; that would keep the nations which it subdued under its control by the terror of arms rather than by the administration of just laws; Daniel 7:23.

(2) The ten horns that Daniel saw spring out of its head denoted ten kings that would arise, or a succession of rulers that would sway the authority of the kingdom, Daniel 7:24.

(3) The other horn that sprang up among the ten, and after them, denoted another dynasty that would arise, and this would have peculiar characteristics. It would so far have connection with the former that it would spring out of them. But in most important respects it would differ from them. Its characteristics may be summed up as follows:

(a) It would spring from their midst, or be somehow attached, or connected with them - as the horn sprang from the head of the beast - and this would properly denote that the new power somehow sprang from the dynasty denoted by the fourth beast - as the horn sprang from the head of that beast;

(b) though springing from that, it would be "diverse" from it, having a character to be determined, not from the mere fact of its origin, but from something else.

(c) It would "subdue three of these kings;" that is, it would evercome and prostrate a certain portion of the power and authority denoted by the ten horns perhaps meaning that it would usurp something like one-third of the power of the kingdom denoted by the fourth beast.

(d) It would be characterized by arrogance and haughtiness - so much so that the fair construction of its claims would be that of "speaking against the Most High."

(e) It would "wear out the saints of the Most High" - evidently referring to persecution.

(f) It would claim legislative authority so as to "change times and laws" - clearly referring to some claim set up over established laws, or to unusual authority, Daniel 7:24-25.

(4) Into the hand of this new power, all these things would be given for "a time, and times, and half a time:" implying that it would not be permanent, but would come to an end, Daniel 7:25.

(5) After that there would be a judgment - a judicial determination in regard to this new power, and the dominion would be taken away, to be utterly destroyed, Daniel 7:26.

(6) There would come a period when the whole dominion of the earth would pass into the hands of the saints; or, in other words, there would be a universal reign of the principles of truth and righteousness, Daniel 7:27.

In the conclusion of the chapter Daniel 7:28, Daniel says that these communications deeply affected his heart. He had been permitted to look far into futurity, and to contemplate vast changes in the progress of human affairs, and even to look forward to a period when all the nations would be brought under the dominion of the law of God, and the friends of the Most High would be put in possession of all power. Such events were fitted to fill the mind with solemn thought, and it is not wonderful that he contemplated them with deep emotion.

Section II.-- Various Methods of Interpreting This Chapter

It is hardly necessary to say that there have been very different methods of interpreting this chapter, and that the views of its proper interpretation are by no means agreed on by expositors. It may be useful to refer to some of those methods before we advance to its exposition, that they may be before the mind in its consideration. We shall be the better able to ascertain what is the true interpretation by inquiring which of them, if any, accords with the fair exposition of the language employed by the sacred writer. The opinions entertained may be reduced to the following classes:

I. Hardt supposes that the four beasts here denote four particular kings - Nebuchadnezzar, Evil-Merodach, Belshazzar, and Cyrus.

II. Ephraem, who is followed by Eichhorn, supposes that the first beast referred to the Babylonian-Chaldean kingdom; the second, the Medish empire under Cyaxares II, the three "ribs" of which denote the Medish, Persian, and Chaldean portions of that empire; the third, the Persian empire, the four heads and wings of which denote the spread of the Persian empire toward the four regions under heaven, or to all parts of the world; the fourth, to the Grecian empire under Alexander and his successors, the ten horns of which denote ten eminent kings among the successors of Alexander, and the "little horn," that sprang up among them, Antiochus Epiphanes. The succeeding state of things, according to Ephraem and Eichhorn, refers to the kingdom of the Messiah.

III. Grotius, representing another class of interpreters, whom Hetzel follows, supposes that the succession of the kingdoms here referred to is the Babylonian-Chaldean; the Persian; the kingdom of Alexander, and his successors. The fifth is the Roman empire.

IV. The most common interpretation which has prevailed in the church is what supposes that the first beast denotes the Chaldean kingdom; the second, the Medo-Persian; the third, the Greek empire under Alexander and his successors; the fourth, the Roman empire. The dominion of the saints is the reign of the Messiah and his laws. But this opinion, particularly as far as pertains to the fourth and fifth of these kingdoms, has had a great variety of modifications, especially in reference to the signification of the ten horns, and the little horn that sprang up among them. Some who, under the fifth kingdom, suppose that the reign of Christ is referred to, regard the fourth kingdom as relating to Rome under the Caesars, and that the ten horns refer to a succession of ten regents, and the little horn to Julius Caesar. Others, who refer the last empire to the personal reign of Christ on the earth, and the kingdom which he would set up, suppose that the ten horns refer to ten kings or dynasties that sprang out of the Roman power - either a succession of the emperors, or those who came in after the invasion of the northern hordes, or certain kingdoms of Europe which succeeded the Roman power after it fell; and by the little horn, they suppose that either the Turkish power with its various branches is designated, or Mahomet, or the Papacy, or Anti-christ.

V. The Jews, in general, suppose that the fifth kingdom refers to the reign of the Messiah; but still there has been great diversity of views among them in regard to the application of particular parts of the prophecy. Many of the older interpreters among them supposed that the ten horns denoted ten Roman Caesars, and that the last horn referred to Titus Vespasian. Most of the later Jewish interpreters refer this to their fabulous Gog and Magog.

VI. Another interpretation which has had its advocates is what supposes that the first kingdom was the Chaldean; the second, the Persian; the third, that of Alexander; the fourth, that of his successors; and the fifth, that of the Asmonean princes who rose up to deliver the Jewish nation from the despotism of the Syrian kings.

VII. As a specimen of one mode of interpretation which has prevailed to some extent in the church, the opinion of Cocceius may be referred to. He supposes that the first beast, with the eagle's wings, denoted the reign of the Christian emperors in Rome, and the spread of Christianity under them into remote regions of the East and West; the second, with the three ribs in his mouth, the Arian Goths, Vandals, and Lombards; the third, with the four heads and four wings, the Mahometan kingdom with the four Caliphates; the fourth, the kingdom of Charlemagne, and the ten horns in this kingdom, the Carlovingians, Saxons, Salle, Swedish, Hollandish, English, etc., princes and dynasties or people; and the little horn, the Papacy as the actual Anti-christ.

The statement of these various opinions, and methods of interpretation, I have translated from Bertholdt, Daniel, pp. 419-426. To these should be added the opinion which Bertholdt himself maintains, and which has been held by many others, and which Bertholdt has explained and defended at length, pp. 426-446. That opinion is, substantially, that the first kingdom is the Babylonian kingdom under Nebuchadnezzar, and that the wings of the first beast denote the extended spread of that empire. The second beast, with the three "ribs," or fangs, denotes the Median, Lydian, and Babylonian kingdoms, which were erected under one scepter, the Persian. The third beast, with the four wings and four heads, denotes the Grecian dynasty under Alexander, and the spread of that kingdom throughout the four parts of the world. The fourth beast denotes the kingdom of the Lagidae and Seleucidae, under which the Hebrews suffered so much. The statement respecting this kingdom Daniel 7:7, that "it was diverse from all that went before it," refers to the "plurality of the fourth kingdom." or the fact that it was an aggregate made up of many others - a kingdom in a collective sense. The "ten horns" denote ten successive princes or kings in that kingdom, and Bertholdt enumerates them in the following order:

  1. Seleucus Nicator;

  2. Antiochus Soter;

  3. Antiochus Theos;

  4. Seleucus Kallinicus;

  5. Seleucus Keraunus;

  6. Antiochus the Great;

  7. Seleucus Philopater;

  8. Heliodorus;

  9. Ptolemy Philometer;

  10. Demetrius.

The eleventh - denoted by the little horn - was Antiochus Epiphanes, who brought so many calamitities upon the Hebrew people. His reign lasted, according to Bertholdt, "a time, and times, and half a time" - or three years and a half; and then the kingdom was restored to the people of God to be a permanent reign, and, ultimately, under the Messiah, to fill the world and endure to the end of time.

The interpretation thus stated, supposing that the "little horn" refers to Antiochus Epiphanes, is also maintained by Prof. Stuart. - Hints on Prophecy, 2nd ed., pp. 85-98. Compare also Commentary on Daniel, pp. 173-194, and 205-211.

Amidst such a variety of views, the only hope of arriving at any satisfactory conclusion respecting the meaning of this chapter is by a careful examination of the text, and the fair meaning of the symbols employed by Daniel.

1

Daniel 7:1

開啟正文

巴比倫王伯沙撒元年——關於伯沙撒的為人和統治,見但以理書第五章導論第二節。他是巴比倫諸王中的最後一位;這一事實對這夢中所啟示的事,或可提供一些亮光。

但以理作了一個夢——按希伯來文的邊註作「看見」。他在睡著時於異象中看見一連串的事件。「夢」一詞指那表像而言;按其性質,說他彷彿看見了它,是恰當的。比較 Daniel 2:1 的註釋。

以及他躺在床上時腦中的異象——見 Daniel 4:5 的註釋。

他就記錄這夢——他當時便把它記錄下來。他沒有把它託付傳統,也沒有等它應驗之後才記錄,而是在所述事件發生之前許久,便把這預言筆之於書,好叫預言應驗時,人可以把它與事件相比較。眾先知慣於記錄他們的預言——無論是藉夢、藉異象、或藉傳給他們的話傳達的——好叫事件發生時,沒有人能懷疑先前曾有受默示的預言論及它,並使人有機會把預言與事件仔細比較。眾先知常奉命記錄他們的預言。見 Isaiah 8:1、Isaiah 8:16;Isaiah 30:8;Habakkuk 2:2。比較 Revelation 1:19;Revelation 14:13;Revelation 21:5。在許多事例中,如我們眼前這一件,記錄是在事件發生前幾百年作的;而且,既然在這樣的事上可能有的證據都表明記錄並未曾改動以遷就事件,這便為先知們的默示提供了最高的證明。這裏的意思是:但以理在夢一發生之後,隨即把它寫下來。

述說其中的大意——迦勒底文作「說了話語的頭」。就是說,他是藉着寫作來述說的。他以這方式把它們傳達給世人。這並不暗示他曾向任何人作口頭的傳達,而是說他傳達了它們——即以所指明的方式。這裏譯作「大意」的字——ראשׁ(rē'sh)——意為「頭」;恰當地指一種綜括的記錄或摘要——即以簡短的方式陳述一書的內容、或一件事的主要之點而不涉細節。這裏的意思似乎是:他沒有進入細節——如寫下名字、日期、地點;或者說,他沒有對他從海中上來之眾獸所見的一切作詳盡的描述,而是記下那可視為特殊、具有特定意義的內容。

基西亞努斯抄本(Codex Chisianus)對此譯作 ἔγραψεν ἐις κεφάλαια λόγων(egrapsen eis kephalaia logōn)——「他把話語寫成綱目」,就是把內容簡化為摘要式的描述。Lengerke 在此處的評語很中肯:眾先知描述將來臨到暴君們的事時,是用比較幽暗隱晦的方式傳達他們的神諭,然而到事件發生時便顯為清楚。其理由是明顯的。許多預言的意義若被它們所指的人明白,那事實便會成為促使他們挫敗預言的動機;而預言的應驗既繫於他們自願的行動,預言便會落空。因此,一般說來,必須避免直接的預言、避免提名道姓和日期地點,而使用在預言發出之時意義隱晦、到事件發生時卻顯而易明的表號。把 Daniel 7:4、Daniel 7:9、Daniel 7:11、Daniel 7:14 比較一下,就可以看出所記錄的不過是將要發生之事的摘要。

事——邊註按迦勒底文作「話語」。然而「話語」一詞也常用來指事物。

英文原文

In the first year of Belshazzar king of Babylon - On the character and reign of Belshazzar, see Introduction to Daniel 5 Section II. He was the last of the kings of Babylon, and this fact may cast some light on the disclosures made in the dream.

Daniel had a dream - Margin, as in Hebrew, saw. He saw a series of events in vision when he was asleep. The dream refers to that representation, and was of such a nature that it was proper to speak of it as if he saw it. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:1.

And visions of his head upon his bed - See the notes at Daniel 4:5.

Then he wrote the dream - He made a record of it at the time. He did not commit it to tradition, or wait for its fulfillment before it was recorded, but long before the events referred to occurred he committed the prediction to writing, that when the prophecy was fulfilled they might be compared with it. It was customary among the prophets to record their predictions, whether communicated in a dream, in a vision, or by words to them, that there might be no doubt when the event occurred that there had been an inspired prediction of it, and that there might be an opportunity of a careful comparison of the prediction with the event. Often the prophets were commanded to record their predictions. See Isaiah 8:1, Isaiah 8:16; Isaiah 30:8; Habakkuk 2:2. Compare Revelation 1:19; Revelation 14:13; Revelation 21:5. In many instances, as in the case before us, the record was made hundreds of years before the event occurred, and as there is all the evidence that there could be in a case that the record has not been altered to adapt it to the event, the highest proof is thus furnished of the inspiration of the prophets. The meaning here is, that Daniel wrote out the dream as soon as it occurred.

And told the sum of the matters - Chaldee, "And spake the head of the words." That is, he spake or told them by writing. He made a communication of them in this manner to the world. It is not implied that he made any oral communication of them to anyone, but that he communicated them - to wit, in the way specified. The word "sum" here - ראשׁ rē'sh - means "head"; and would properly denote such a record as would be a heading up, or a summary - as stating in a brief way the contents of a book, or the chief points of a thing without going into detail. The meaning here seems to be that he did not go into detail - as by writing names, and dates, and places; or, perhaps, that he did not enter into a minute description of all that he saw in regard to the beasts that came up from the sea, but that he recorded what might be considered as peculiar, and as having special significancy.

The Codex Chisianus renders this, ἔγραψεν ἐις κεφάλαια λόγων egrapsen eis kephalaia logōn - "He wrote in heads of words," that is, he reduced it to a summary description. It is well remarked by Lengerke, on this place, that the prophets, when they described what was to occur to tyrants in future times, conveyed their oracles in a comparatively dark and obscure manner, yet so as to be clear when the events should occur. The reason of this is obvious. If the meaning of many of the predictions had been understood by those to whom they referred, that fact would have been a motive to them to induce them to defeat them; and as the fulfillment depended on their voluntary agency, the prophecy would have been void. It was necessary, therefore, in general, to avoid direct predictions, and the mention of names, dates, and places, and to make use of symbols whose meaning would be obscure at the time when the prediction was made, but which would be plain when the event should occur. A comparison of Daniel 7:4, Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:11, Daniel 7:14, will show that only a sumptuary of what was to occur was recorded.

Matters - Margin, as in Chaldee, words. The term words, however; is often used to denote things.

2

Daniel 7:2

開啟正文

但以理說——即照前一節所暗示的方式說話陳述。他是藉着當時所作的記錄來說話,因此可以說,他乃是對他自己的世代以及未來一切時代說話。

我夜間的異象是這樣——我在異象中觀看;即他接下來所描述的場景,以表象呈現在他眼前。他彷彿看見暴風中的大海、從海中上來的怪獸,以及隨後接踵而至的一連串奇事。

看哪,天的四風——即在天空之下吹動、或看似從天空(即空氣)而來的風。比較Jeremiah 49:36。這裏說風的數目為四,正如今日一樣,因為風主要從地的四個方位吹來。如今以東、南、西、北四方之風來稱呼風,乃是最常見的方式。拉丁人也是如此——Eurus(東風)、Auster(南風)、Zephyrus(西風)、Boreas(北風)。

陡起——מגיחן(megı̂ychân)。爆開,或猛衝而出;似乎彼此衝突。眾風從四面八方爆出、猛衝,彷彿在海面上相遇,使海翻騰成狂亂的騷動。希伯來文字根(גיח,gı̂yach)意為破裂或湧出,如泉源或水流的湧出(Job 40:23)、嬰兒從母腹破出(Job 38:8)、戰士衝出迎戰(Ezekiel 32:2)。因此這個迦勒底字意為爆出,或如風猛衝而出。這裏的表號自然指列國中某種劇烈的騷動,彷彿天上的風在混亂中一齊猛撲。

颳在大海之上——這說法可恰當地適用於任何大海或大洋,但臨到但以理心中的,大概是地中海,因為那是他和同時代的人最熟知的。翻騰的洋海——或被暴風吹刮的洋海——乃是自然的表號,可代表因內部衝突而震盪的一個民族或多個民族,或處於革命之中的列國。在聖詩作者和先知筆下,入侵一地的軍隊大群被比作氾濫的洪水,列國間的劇變被比作暴風中翻騰的洋海巨浪。比較Jeremiah 46:7-8; Jeremiah 47:2; Isaiah 8:7-8; Isaiah 17:12; Isaiah 59:19; Daniel 11:40; Revelation 13:1。熟諳古典的讀者讀到這裏的描述,必會想起維吉爾(Virgil)《埃涅阿斯紀》(AEn. I. 82以下)的詩句:

"Ac venti, velut agmine facto

Qua data porta ruunt, et terras turbine perflant.

Incubuere mari, totumque a sedibus imis

Una Eurusque, Notusque ruunt, creberquc procellis.

Africus, et vastos volvunt ad littora fluctus."

比較Ovid, Trist. I. 2, 25以下。但以理所見、代表相繼諸國的眾獸,彷彿正是從這翻騰的海中上來;這表號這一部分的公正解釋是:在但以理的異象中所見,列國中曾有、或將有類似被暴風驅策之海的騷動,而從這些騷動中,將相繼興起具有四獸形像所示特徵的諸國。在尋求這預言的應驗時,我們自然會留意這樣一種狀態:列國震盪翻騰,如風在海面上互相爭競般彼此鬥爭——即這四個相繼之王國興起之前所處的狀態。現在姑不斷定那是否就是此處所指的時期,但可以肯定,這裏所說的一切,在緊接尼布甲尼撒登位、或他所建立並裝飾之王國之前的時期中,都有完全對應的實況。他迅速而廣大的征服、列國為自衛起見的震盪、以及他們彼此之間的戰爭,正好用但以理在異象中所見洋海的翻騰來表達。不錯,歷史上還有許多別的時期也適用這幅圖像,但無人能否認它適用於這個時期;如果設計的本意是要描繪一系列以尼布甲尼撒的王國為發端的王國,這一點便已足夠。

英文原文

Daniel spake and said - That is, he spake and said in the manner intimated in the previous verse. It was by a record made at the time, and thus he might be said to speak to his own generation and to all future times.

I saw in my vision by night - I beheld in the vision; that is, he saw represented to him the scene which he proceeds to describe. He seemed to see the sea in a tempest, and these monsters come up from it, and the strange succession of events which followed.

And behold, the four winds of the heaven - The winds that blow under the heaven, or that seem to come from the heaven - or the air. Compare Jeremiah 49:36. The number of the winds is here referred to as four as they are now, as blowing mainly from the four quarters of the earth. Nothing is more common now than to designate them in this manner - as the east, the south, the west, the north wind. So the Latins - Eurus, Auster, Zephyrus, Boreas.

Strove - מגיחן megı̂ychân. Burst, or rushed forth; seemed to conflict together. The winds burst, rushed from all quarters, and seemed to meet on the sea, throwing it into wild commotion. The Hebrew word (גיח gı̂yach) means to break or burst forth, as a fountain or stream of waters, Job 40:23; an infant breaking forth from the womb, Job 38:8; a warrior rushing forth to battle, Ezekiel 32:2. Hence, the Chaldean to break forth; to rush forth as the winds. The symbol here would naturally denote some wild commotion among the nations, as if the winds of heaven should rush together in confusion.

Upon the great sea - This expression would properly apply to any great sea or ocean, but it is probable that the one that would occur to Daniel would be the Mediterranean Sea, as that was best known to him and his contemporaries. A heaving ocean - or an ocean tossed with storms - would be a natural emblem to denote a nation, or nations, agitated with internal conflicts, or nations in the midst of revolutions. Among the sacred poets and the prophets, hosts of armies invading a land are compared to overflowing waters, and mighty changes among the nations to the heaving billows of the ocean in a storm. Compare Jeremiah 46:7-8; Jeremiah 47:2; Isaiah 8:7-8; Isaiah 17:12; Isaiah 59:19; Daniel 11:40; Revelation 13:1. The classic reader will be reminded in the description here of the words of Virgil, AEn. I. 82, following:

"Ac venti, velut agmine facto

Qua data porta ruunt, et terras turbine perflant.

Incubuere mari, totumque a sedibus imis

Una Eurusque, Notusque ruunt, creberquc procellis.

Africus, et vastos volvunt ad littora fluctus."

Compare also Ovid, Trist. I. 2, 25, following. It was from this agitated sea that the beasts that Daniel saw, representing successive kingdoms, seemed to rise; and the fair interpretation of this part of the symbol is, that there was, or would be, as it appeared in vision to Daniel, commotions among the nations resembling the sea driven by storms, and that from these commotions there would arise successive kingdoms having the characteristics specified by the appearance of the four beasts. We naturally look, in the fulfillment of this, to some state of things in which the nations were agitated and convulsed; in which they struggled against each other, as the winds strove upon the sea; a state of things which preceded the rise of these four successive kingdoms. Without now pretending to determine whether that was the time denoted by this, it is certain that all that is here said would find a counterpart in the period which immediately preceded the reign of Nebuchadnezzar, or the kingdom which he founded and adorned. His rapid and extensive conquests; the agitation of the nations in self-defense, and their wars against one another, would be well denoted by the agitation of the ocean as seen in vision by Daniel. It is true that there have been many other periods of the world to which the image would be applicable, but no one can doubt that it was applicable to this period, and that would be all that would be necessary if the design was to represent a series of kingdoms commencing with that of Nebuchadnezzar.

3

Daniel 7:3

開啟正文

有四個大獸從海中上來——不是一齊上來,而是相繼上來。見以下各節。牠們具體的形狀,在隨後的各節中描述。此處提到牠們從海中上來,用意似乎是要表明,這一連續的王國,是從以翻騰大洋所代表的列國之騷動與紛亂中興起的。先知們用動物來代表或象徵王國和民族,並不罕見——通常是用某種在某種程度上為那被象徵之地所特有、或在那地大量出沒的動物。這樣,在 Isaiah 27:1,利維亞坦(或稱龍,或鱷魚)被用來代表巴比倫。見該節的註釋。在 Ezekiel 29:3-5,龍或尼羅河的鱷魚代表法老;在 Ezekiel 32:2,法老被比作少壯獅子和海中的鯨魚。在 Psalm 74:13-14,埃及王國被比作龍和利維亞坦。

同樣,在古錢幣上,動物也常被用作王國的徽記;還可以補充說,獅子和獨角獸如今代表英國,鷹則代表美國。Lengerke(in loc.)中肯地指出:當先知們要表示由別國組成的王國、或藉着征服被置於他國權下而結合起來的王國時,他們不是用自然界實際存在的單一動物,而是用怪獸——由不同動物複合而成的傳說生物,把不同動物各自的特質集於一身——有鷹翅的獅子便是一例。這樣,在 Revelation 13:1,羅馬教會的權勢由一個從海中上來、有七頭十角的獸代表。可比較次經以斯德拉二書(Apocry.)11:1,那裏描述一隻鷹有十二個翎羽的翅膀和三個頭,從海中上來。至於次經著作模仿先知的嘗試,可參考以斯德拉二書第十一、十二章全章。

形狀各有不同——牠們雖然都從同一深淵上來,卻彼此有別——這無疑表示,所論及那些相繼興起的王國雖都出自以翻騰之海所代表的列國,但在重要的方面卻彼此不同。

英文原文

And four great beasts came up from the sea - Not at once, but in succession. See the following verses. Their particular form is described in the subsequent verses. The design of mentioning them here, as coming up from, the sea, seems to have been to show that this succession of kingdoms sprang from the agitations and commotions among the nations represented by the heaving ocean. It is not uncommon for the prophets to make use of animals to represent or symbolize kingdoms and nations - usually by some animal which was in a manner peculiar to the land that was symbolized, or which abounded there. Thus in Isaiah 27:1, leviathan, or the dragon, or crocodile, is used to represent Babylon. See the note at that passage. In Ezekiel 29:3-5, the dragon or the crocodile of the Nile is put for Pharaoh; in Ezekiel 32:2, Pharaoh is compared to a young lion, and to a whale in the seas. In Psalm 74:13-14, the kingdom of Egypt is compared to the dragon and the leviathan.

So on ancient coins, animals are often used as emblems of kingdoms, as it may be added, the lion and the unicorn represent Great Britain now, and the eagle the United States. It is well remarked by Lengerke (in loc.), that when the prophets design to represent kingdoms that are made up of other kingdoms, or that are combined by being brought by conquest under the power of others, they do this, not by any single animal as actually found in nature, but by monsters - fabulous beings that are compounded of others, in which the peculiar qualities of different animals are brought together - as in the case of the lion with eagle's wings. Thus in Revelation 13:1, the Romish power is represented by a beast coming out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns, Compare it. Ezra (Apocry.) 11:1, where an eagle is represented as coming from the sea with twelve feathered wings and three heads. As an illustration of the attempts made in the apocryphal writings to imitate the prophets, the whole of chapter 11 and chapter 12 of the second book of Ezra may be referred to.

Diverse one from another - Though they all came up from the same abyss, yet they differed from each other - denoting, doubtless, that though the successive kingdoms referred to would all rise out of the nations represented by the agitated sea, yet that in important respects they would differ from each other.

4

Daniel 7:4

開啟正文

頭一個像獅子——在解釋和應用這些象徵時,必須假定它們是有意義的——即用這些象徵來代表所指的各國,其中有某種適切性或恰當性;或者說,在每一個例子中,都有理由選用某一種動物而非別的作象徵——即獅子身上有某種特質,比熊或豹更適合象徵所指的國,這就是在此選用這一象徵的原因。還要進一步假定,象徵中的一切特徵都有意義,並且我們要期望在它們所要代表的國中找到這一切特徵;除非在某國的性質或歷史中,找到與象徵所提的各具體情形、以及其排列或承接同樣相符的東西,否則就不能把這象徵公正地應用於該國。就第一個獸而言,象徵中包含五樣東西,而且都要假定是有意義的:獅子、鷹的翅膀、翅膀被拔去這一事實、獸被立起來像人一樣用兩腳站立這一事實、以及牠得了人心這一事實。現在宜按次序逐一考慮,然後探究它們是否在任何已知的情況中得到應驗。

(a) 所見的動物:「獅子」。獅子是「百獸之王」,是力量與勇氣的象徵,因而成為君王恰當的表徵——如穆斯林稱穆罕默德的女婿阿里為「常勝的神之獅」。聖經中也常這樣使用。Genesis 49:9:「猶大是個小獅子;我兒啊,你抓了食便上去。你屈下身去,臥如公獅,蹲如母獅,誰敢惹你?」這裏無疑是表示那支派的尚武特性、征服和優越地位。Ezekiel 19:2-3 也是如此:「你的母親是甚麼呢?是個母獅子,蹲伏在獅子中間,在少壯獅子中養育小獅子。」Grotius 說,這是暗指 Genesis 49:9。猶大在列國中間,如母獅在森林的走獸中間;她有力量和主權。獅子也是英雄的表徵:2 Samuel 23:20:「他殺了摩押人亞利伊勒的兩個兒子」(即兩個獅子般的人)。比較 Gesenius zu Isa. i. 851. 荷馬也稱赫拉克勒斯和阿基里斯為 θυμολέοντα(thumoleonta)或 λεοντόθυμον(leontothumon)——獅子心腸的——Iliad e 639, ee 228;Odyssey l 766. 關於獅子的特性、無畏和習性的詳盡說明,見 Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 2, pp. 723-745;Credner, der prophet Joel, s. 100. f. 另比較聖經中下列各處:Psalm 7:2; Psalm 22:21; Psalm 57:4; Psalm 58:6; Psalm 74:4; 1 Samuel 17:37; Job 4:10; Jeremiah 4:7; Jeremiah 49:19; Joel 1:6; Isaiah 29:1-2. 就獅子這表徵而言,此處恰當的意思是:一個以權能、征服、統治著稱的王或國;他在別的王和國中間,如同獅子在森林的走獸中間——使他們望而生畏,維持對他們的統治——任意而行,無人能與他較量或抵擋他。

(b) 鷹的翅膀:「有鷹的翅膀」。這裏出現了這表徵的一個特點——把自然界中不會結合在一起的東西結合起來——描繪出任何單一動物都無法代表的東西或特質。獅子代表所指之國的一方面、一種特質——權能、統治、主權——但那位王或那國中將有某種特徵,是獅子身上任何東西都無法恰當代表的,只能把別種動物身上才有的特質加在牠身上,才能加以象徵。獅子以權能、統治、使百獸懾伏——以牠的撲躍和打擊的猛烈——著稱,卻不以速度、不以遠出征服著稱。牠不會為達目的而遠行,其行動也不以迅捷見長。因此,獅子被加上了鷹的翅膀。這樣,這象徵的恰當意思,就是迅速取得的統治或征服——彷彿百獸之王的獅子,不是像平常那樣以撲跳的方式、限定在一定的空間或範圍內活動,而是像鷹那樣,以快速而持久的飛行,把牠的征服擴展到遠方。把這段經文與 Isaiah 46:11 比較,就可以明白這象徵的含義;那裏古列被比作「鷙鳥」——「我召鷙鳥從東方來,召那成就我籌算的人從遠方來」。鷹是迅速的表徵:Jeremiah 4:13:「他的馬比鷹更快」;Jeremiah 48:40:「仇敵必如大鷹飛起,展開翅膀,攻擊摩押」。另見 Jeremiah 49:22; Lamentations 4:19; Habakkuk 1:8.

(c) 翅膀被拔去:「我正觀看的時候,獸的翅膀被拔去」。所用的字(מרט,meraṭ)意思是拔出或扯掉,如拔鬍鬚(比較 Nehemiah 13:25; Isaiah 50:6),在此恰當地指從鷹翅上拔除羽毛或翎羽的過程。這象徵明顯而恰當的意思是:征服者的進展受到了某種遏制——如同鷹被拔去翅上的羽毛一樣;即他征服的迅速將告終。先知說,他一直觀看到這事成就,暗示這不是一時之間發生的,卻給人留下這些征服曾擴展甚遠的印象。然而它們終於受到遏制,我們再看見那沒有翅膀的獅子——那位不再把他的勝利擴展到全地的君王。

(d) 從地被立起來:「獸從地上得立起來,用兩腳站立,像人一樣」。就是說,翅膀既被拔去,獅子便被立起,用後腳直立——一個不尋常的姿勢,但這象徵的含義並不難明白。牠仍是獅子——仍是那位君王——卻改變了,彷彿獅子變成了人;就是說,彷彿獅子的兇猛、力量和活力,讓位給人相對的軟弱。這裏所指境況的改變之大,就如一頭如此兇猛強大的獅子,本性大變,竟站立起來,像人一樣行走。這顯然表示某種重大的改變——某種不尋常的事——兇猛程度減少、卻又可能變為相對軟弱的事——因為人比獅子軟弱。

(e) 牠得了人心:「又得了人心」。在聖經中,「心」字常比我們今日一般的用法更接近指悟性或理解力;這裏它大概是一個統稱,指某種像人性之物——即這件事上的改變,將如獅子的本性變為人的本性那樣大;或者,這意思可能是:這個以鷹的迅速和獅子的兇猛、把兵威橫掃全世的大帝國,其進程將受到遏制;它的兇暴將被馴服,並以相對的節制和人道為特徵。在 Daniel 4:16,論到尼布甲尼撒有話說:「使他的心改變,不如人心,給他一個獸心」;這裏的象徵若是指他,就不是指他被迫像獸一樣吃草的那一羞辱場面,而是指他終於能像人那樣看待事物;他不再像猛獸那樣行事,而被引到平靜的自省,像人——一個有理性的人——那樣思想和說話。或者,這若是指巴比倫帝國而非君王本人,其意思便是:在諸王相繼之下,那民族起了變化,以致帝國初期諸王的兇猛殘暴止息了,那民族不但停止了征服,而且實實在在在某種程度上變得節制而理性。

現在,關於這象徵的應用,幾乎沒有甚麼困難,解經家之間也幾乎沒有異議。所有人、或幾乎所有人都同意,它是指尼布甲尼撒為首的巴比倫國,以及在他之後相對軟弱的諸王相繼在位時、征服之兇猛逐漸減弱的事。無論對但以理書持甚麼觀點——無論視之為但以理本人所寫、成於其自稱寫作之時的默示預言,還是認為它是在他之後許久、由冒他之名偽作之人寫成——都不容懷疑,它是指巴比倫帝國的首位,或 Daniel 2 大像中「金頭」所代表的那國。各樣情節都與這應用十分吻合,因此,雖然在異象的講解(Daniel 7:16-27)中並沒有解釋這一部分——因為但以理的困惑特別在於第四獸(Daniel 7:19)——但其所指為何,不可能有合理的懷疑。因為:

(a) 獅子——百獸之王——準確地象徵尼布甲尼撒時代的巴比倫國——那國在列國中間的地位,正如獅子在百獸中間的地位,其權能與兇猛由獅子貼切地描繪出來。見 Daniel 2:37-38 註釋中對這國的性質和地位的詳盡說明。

(b) 鷹的翅膀準確地表示那國迅速的征服——它彷彿離開本國本土,向外飛翔。單是獅子,已可代表那國既已擴張、或已居列國之首的性質;鷹的翅膀,則代表巴比倫的軍威迅速推進到巴勒斯坦、埃及、亞述等地。誠然,單憑這個象徵,並不能指定是巴比倫,正如它同樣可用於古列、亞歷山大或該撒的征服;但必須按照此處的上下文來理解,而它對巴比倫的貼切適用,是無人能否認的。

(c) 翅膀被剪拔,表示征服的止息——彷彿不再擴展;即我們看見一個曾以侵掠列國著稱的國家,如今停止了征服;其引人注目之處,不在勝利,而在於它居於萬國之首,如獅子之於森林的百獸。凡熟悉歷史的人都知道,那國在尼布甲尼撒的征服之後,便不再以征服著稱;雖然在他的繼承者治下,它仍在列國中保持優越或為首的地位,其勝利卻不再擴展。尼布甲尼撒的繼承者們是相對軟弱而怠惰的君王——彷彿怪獸的翅膀已被拔去。

(d) 獅子立起來、用兩腳像人一樣站立,也恰當地表明那國在尼布甲尼撒繼承者治下的改變。見上文對象徵的解釋。

(e) 牠得了人心,也切合尼布甲尼撒之後、相對軟弱無能的諸王相繼在位期間帝國所生的變化。它不再有獅子的心——不再「獅子心腸」——而是有了人的心;就是說,未被馴服之獸所象徵的狂野兇暴性情,被更能以人來代表的性情所取代。這不是獅子的性情變為熊或豹的性情;也不是把人看作戰士或征服者,而是把人看作與曠野狂野兇猛之獸有別的人。帝國性質的變化——直到伯沙撒微弱的統治下終結——由這象徵貼切地表達出來。

英文原文

The first was like a lion - It is to be assumed, in explaining and applying these symbols, that they are significant - that is, that there was some adaptedness or propriety in using these symbols to denote the kingdoms referred to; or that in each case there was a reason why the particular animal was selected for a symbol rather than one of the others; that is, there was something in the lion that was better fitted to symbolize the kingdom referred to than there was in the bear or the leopard, and this was the reason why this particular symbol was chosen in the case. It is to be further assumed that all the characteristics in the symbol were significant, and we are to expect to find them all in the kingdom which they were designed to represent; nor can the symbol be fairly applied to any kingdom, unless something shall be found in its character or history that shall correspond alike to the particular circumstances referred to in the symbol, and to the grouping or succession. In regard to the first beast, there were five things that entered into the symbol, all of which it is to be presumed were significant: the lion, the eagle's wings - the fact that the wings were plucked - the fact that the beast was lifted up so as to stand up as a man - and the fact that the heart of a man was given to it. It is proper to consider these in their order, and then to inquire whether they found a fulfillment in any known state of things.

(a) The animal that was seen: "the lion." The lion, "the king of beasts," is the symbol of strength and courage, and becomes the proper emblem of a king - as when the Mussulmans call Ali, Mahomet's son-in-law, "The Lion of God, always victorious." Thus it is often used in the Scriptures. Genesis 49:9, "Judah is a lion's whelp: from the prey, my son, thou art gone up: he stooped down, he couched as a lion, and as an old lion; who shall rouse him up?" The warlike character, the conquest, the supremacy of that tribe are here undoubtedly denoted. So in Ezekiel 19:2-3. "What is thy mother? A lioness: she lay down among lions, she nourished her whelps among young lions." Here is an allusion, says Grotius, to Genesis 49:9. Judea was among the nations like a lioness among the beasts of the forest; she had strength and sovereignty. The lion is an emblem of a hero: 2 Samuel 23:20, "He slew two lion-like men of Moab." Compare Gesenius zu Isa. i. 851. So Hercules and Achilles are called by Homer θυμολέοντα thumoleonta, or λεοντόθυμον leontothumon - lion-hearted - Iliad e 639, ee 228, Odyssey l 766. See the character, the intrepidity, and the habits of the lion fully illustrated in Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 2, pp. 723-745 - Credner, der prophet Joel, s. 100. f. Compare also the following places in Scripture: Psalm 7:2; Psalm 22:21; Psalm 57:4; Psalm 58:6; Psalm 74:4; 1 Samuel 17:37; Job 4:10; Jeremiah 4:7; Jeremiah 49:19; Joel 1:6; Isaiah 29:1-2. The proper notion here, so far as the emblem of a lion is concerned, is that of a king or kingdom that would be distinguished for power, conquest, dominion; that would be in relation to other kings and kingdoms as the lion is among the beasts of the forest - keeping them in awe, and maintaining dominion over them - marching where he pleases, with none to cope with him or to resist him.

(b) The eagle's wings: "and had eagle's wings." Here appears one peculiarity of the emblem - the union of things which are not found joined together in nature - the representation of things or qualities which no one animal would represent. The lion would denote one thing, or one quality in the kingdom referred to - power, dominion, sovereignty - but there would be some characteristic in that king or kingdom which nothing in the lion would properly represent, and which could be symbolized only by attaching to him qualities to be found in some other animal. The lion, distinguished for his power, his dominion, his keeping other animals in awe - his spring, and the severity of his blow - is not remarkable for his speed, nor for going forth to conquest. He does not range far to accomplish his purpose, nor are his movements eminent for fleetness. Hence, there were attached to the lion the wings of an eagle. The proper notion, therefore, of this symbol, would be that of a dominion or conquest rapidly secured, as if a lion, the king of beasts, should move, not as he commonly does, with a spring or bound, confining himself to a certain space or range, but should move as the eagle does, with rapid and prolonged flight, extending his conquests afar. The meaning of the symbol may be seen by comparing this passage with Isaiah 46:11, where Cyrus is compared to "a ravenous bird" - "calling a ravenous bird from the east, the man that executeth my counsels from a far country." The eagle is an emblem of swiftness: Jeremiah 4:13, "His horses are swifter than eagles;" Jeremiah 48:40, "Behold, he shall fly as an eagle, and shall spread his wings over Moab." See also Jeremiah 49:22; Lamentations 4:19; Habakkuk 1:8.

(c) The clipping of the wings: "I beheld until the wings thereof were plucked" The word used (מרט meraṭ) means, to pluck or pull, as to pull out the beard (compare Nehemiah 13:25; Isaiah 50:6), and would here be properly applied to some process of pulling out the feathers or quills from the wings of the eagle. The obvious and proper meaning of this symbol is, that there was some check put to the progress of the conqueror - as there would be to an eagle by plucking off the feathers from his wings; that is, the rapidity of his conquests would cease. The prophet says, that he looked on until this was done, implying that it was not accomplished at once, but leaving the impression that these conquests were extended far. They were, however, checked, and we see the lion again without the wings; the sovereign who has ceased to spread his triumphs over the earth.

(d) The lifting up from the earth: "and it was lifted up from the earth, and made to stand upon the feet as a man." That is, the lion, with the wings thus plucked off, was made to stand upright on his hind feet - an unusual position, but the meaning of the symbol is not difficult. It was still the lion - the monarch - but changed as if the lion was changed to a man; that is, as if the ferocity, and the power, and the energy of the lion had given place to the comparative weakness of a man. There would be as much difference in the case referred to as there would be if a lion so fierce and powerful should be made so far to change his nature as to stand upright, and to walk as a man. This would evidently denote some remarkable change - something that would be unusual - something where there would be a diminution of ferocity, and yet perhaps a change to comparative weakness - as a man is feebler than a lion.

(e) The giving to it of a man's heart: "and a man heart was given to it." The word heart in the Scriptures often has a closer relation to the intellect or the understanding than it new has commonly with us; and here perhaps it is a general term to denote something like human nature - that is, there would be as great a change in the case as if the nature of the lion should be transformed to that of a man; or, the meaning may be, that this mighty empire, carrying its arms with the rapidity of an eagle, and the fierceness of a lion, through the world, would be checked in its career; its ferocity would be tamed, and it would be characterized by comparative moderation and humanity. In Daniel 4:16, it is said of Nebuchadnezzar, "Let his heart be changed from man's, and let a beast's heart be given unto him;" here, if the symbol refers to him, it does not refer to that scene of humiliation when he was compelled to eat grass like a beast, but to the fact that he was brought to look at things as a man should do; he ceased to act like a ravenous beast, and was led to calm reflection, and to think and speak like a man - a rational being. Or, if it refers to the empire of Babylon, instead of the monarch, it would mean that a change had come over the nation under the succession of princes, so that the fierceness and ferocity of the first princes of the empire had ceased, and the nation had not only closed its conquests, but had actually become, to some extent, moderate and rational.

Now, in regard to the application of this symbol, there can be but little difficulty, and there is almost no difference of opinion among expositors. All, or nearly all, agree that it refers to the kingdom of Babylon, of which Nebuchadnezzar was the head, and to the gradual diminution of the ferocity of conquest under a succession of comparatively weak princes. Whatever view may be taken of the book of Daniel whether it be regarded as inspired prophecy composed by Daniel himself, and written at the time when it professes to have been, or whether it be supposed to have been written long after his time by some one who forged it in his name, there can be no doubt that it relates to the head of the Babylonian empire, or to that which the "head of gold," in the image referred to in Daniel 2, represents. The circumstances all so well agree with that application, that, although in the explication of the dream Daniel 7:16-27 this part of it is not explained - for the perplexity of Daniel related particularly to the fourth beast Daniel 7:19, yet there can be no reasonable doubt as to what was intended. For

(a) the lion - the king of beasts - would accurately symbolize that kingdom in the days of Nebuchadnezzar - a kingdom occupying the same position among other kingdoms which the lion does among other beasts, and well represented in its power and ferocity by the lion. See the character and position of this kingdom fully illustrated in the notes at Daniel 2:37-38.

(b) The eagle's wings would accurately denote the rapid conquests of that kingdom - its leaving, as it were, its own native domain, and flying abroad. The lion alone would have represented the character of the kingdom considered as already having spread itself, or as being at the head of other kingdoms; the wings of the eagle, the rapidity with which the arms of the Babylonians were carried into Palestine, Egypt, Assyria, etc. It is true that this symbol alone would not designate Babylon anymore than it would the conquests of Cyrus, or Alexander, or Caesar, but it is to be taken in the connection in which it is here found, and no one can doubt that it has a striking applicability to Babylon.

(c) The clipping or plucking of these wings would denote the cessation of conquest - as if it would extend no farther; that is, we see a nation once distinguished for the invasion of other nations now ceasing its conquests; and remarkable, not for its victories, but as standing at the head of all other nations, as the lion stands among the beasts of the forest. All who are acquainted with history know that, after the conquests of that kingdom under Nebuchadnezzar, it ceased characteristically to be a kingdom distinguished for conquest, but that, though under his successors, it held a pre-eminence or headship among the nations, yet its victories were extended no further. The successors of Nebuchadnezzar were comparatively weak and indolent princes - as if the wings of the monster had been plucked.

(d) The rising up of the lion on the feet, and standing on the feet as a man, would denote, not inappropriately, the change of the kingdom under the successors of Nebuchadnezzar. See above in the explanation of the symbol.

(e) The giving of a man's heart to it would not be inapplicable to the change produced in the empire after the time of Nebuchadnezzar, and under a succession of comparatively weak and inefficient princes. Instead of the heart of the lion - of being "lion-hearted" - it had the heart of a man; that is, the character of wildness and fierceness denoted by an untamed beast was succeeded by what would be better represented by a human being. It is not the character of the lion changed to that of the bear, or the panther, or the leopard; nor is it man considered as a warrior or conqueror, but man as he is distinguished from the wild and ferocious beast of the desert. The change in the character of the empire, until it ceased under the feeble reign of Belshazzar; would be well denoted by this symbol.

5

Daniel 7:5

開啟正文

又有一獸如熊,就是第二獸——這是說,在獅子出現、而且他注視着牠經歷這些驚人變化之後。關於這個象徵,也有若干情節;這一切都當被視為富有意義,而且在嘗試應用它們之前,都須一一加以解釋。

(a) 所見的動物:熊。關於熊的詳盡描述,見 Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 9。這動物廣為人知,並具有與獅子及其他動物截然不同的特性。用這象徵來表示某個特定的國家,無疑有其原因;而且正如獅子的情形一樣,這國家中必有與這些特性相應之處。熊在某些方面或可作巴比倫的恰當代表,但不能在所有方面、也不能在主要方面如此。據 Bochart(Hieroz. vol. i. p. 812),熊主要以兩件事著稱:狡詐與兇猛。Aristotle 說,熊既貪食,又愚蠢而莽撞。(Wemyss,《聖經象徵語言之鑰》。)希伯來文的名稱取自牠的咆哮或吼叫。比較 Isaiah 59:11:

「我們咆哮如熊。」

比較 Horace, Epod. 16, 51:

「Nec vespertinus circumgemit ursus ovile.」

Virgil 提到牠們的兇猛:

「Atque in praesepibus ursi Saevire.」

——Aen. vii. 17.

熊以在飢餓時、或幼崽被奪時特別兇猛著稱。耶柔米(Jerome)在論 Hosea 13:8 時說:「研究野獸本性的人說,幼崽被奪或飢餓時,沒有野獸比熊更兇猛。」比較 2 Samuel 17:8; Proverbs 17:12; Hosea 13:8。因此,熊所表示的王國的特性,當是兇猛、粗暴、在戰爭中(尤其受刺激時)的激烈;一種比獅子所表示的較不雄壯高貴的精神;對敵人嚴酷,並混有兇殘的狡詐。

(b) 牠在一側起身,即「旁跨而坐」。此處所用的迦勒底文(שׁטר sheṭar)不見於別處。它的意思是「側面」(Gesenius),此處當用於動物的一側,彷彿牠起身時一側比另一側先抬起。拉丁武加大譯本作 in parte stetit。希臘文(Walton)作 έις μέρος ἕν ἐστάθη(eis meros hen estathē)——「牠站在一部分上」;Thompson 則譯作「牠半立着」。基西阿努斯抄本(Codex Chisianus)作 ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλευροῦ ἐστάθη(epi tou henos pleurou estathē)——「牠站在一側上」。Maurer 譯作「牠以一隻前足伏卧,以另一足站立」,並說這正是巴比倫發現的一塊石頭上所刻的形象,其版畫見於 Munter, Religion d. Babyl. p. 112。Lengerke 說,在巴比倫發現的此處所指的動物「右前足跪伏,正以左足起身」。Bertholdt 和哈韋尼克(Havernick)以為這是說那動物後足站立、前半身抬起,如據說熊所做的那樣;但真實的姿態大概如 Maurer 和 Lengerke 所述:那動物正從伏卧的姿勢中起來,以一隻前足支撐身體,另一隻前足向前伸出,那一側的身體部分抬起。這姿態自然表示一個先前安靜休息、如今正為某種目的(如征服或戰爭)而奮起的王國——如伏卧的熊在飢餓時、或出去覓食時起來一般。

(c) 口中的肋骨,即「口齒內啣着三根肋骨」。Bertholdt 以為這是指獠牙或牙——或彎曲如肋骨的獠牙(p. 451)。但迦勒底文 עלע(‛ala‛)的本義與希伯來文 צלע(tsēlâ‛)相同,即「肋骨」。Gesenius。拉丁武加大譯本作 tres ordines——三排;敘利亞文譯本和希臘文譯本作三根肋骨。這足以表現熊的特徵;此處這動物的姿態似乎是:牠已殺了另一隻動物,在吞吃時從其體側撕下三根肋骨,如今啣在口中。牠口中啣着這些肋骨,正緩緩從伏卧的姿勢中起身,即將領受命令出去吞吃多肉。Lengerke 認為此處的「三」是個概數,沒有特別的意義;另有人以為它表示這裏以熊為象徵的百姓所征服的國家或王國的數目。也許後者是這象徵所提示的較明顯的想法;但要正確理解一個象徵,並不必把這一點過分拘泥。這部分象徵自然提示的想法是:一個兇猛粗暴的國家或百姓已經制服了一些對象,在休憩之後,帶着先前勝利的戰利品起來,再去贏得新的勝利、征服別人。這象徵用以代表處於這種姿態的征服民族,是非常鮮明的。

(d) 給這獸的命令:「有吩咐這獸的說:起來吞吃多肉。」即有話對牠說;或有某位有權柄者說了。有聲音命令牠出去吞吃。這命令完全符合熊的本性。Aristotle 稱熊為 σαρκοφαγῶν(sarkofagōn)——食肉者,又為 ξῶον πάμφαγον(xōon pamphagon)——吞噬一切的獸(Hist. Nat. viii. 5),再沒有比這更好的描述了。作為象徵,這恰當地適用於一個彷彿從神領受命令、要出去獲取比已得者更廣闊之征服的民族;從安息中奮起,去贏得新的凱旋。

天使沒有向但以理解釋這象徵的應用;但若前一個象徵屬於巴比倫,那麼要明白這一個指甚麼,就沒有甚麼困難。它顯然指繼巴比倫之後的國——瑪代波斯,即由古列、岡比西斯、斯梅爾迪斯、大利烏、薛西斯、亞達薛西和大利烏·諾圖斯相繼統治,直到被亞歷山大大帝推翻的王國。現在唯一的問題是:此處所用的象徵是否切合這王國。

(a) 熊的象徵。如前所見,熊可以表示任何兇猛、粗暴、專橫而任性的王國;而且顯然,雖然它或可適用於任何這樣的王國,但與獅子相比,它更宜代表瑪代波斯——因為雖然在某些方面,兩個象徵中的任何一個都可適用於兩國中的任何一國,瑪代波斯卻不像巴比倫那樣斷然居於萬國之首。然而就其性格而言,熊並非不恰當的象徵。就整體而言,這民族兇猛、粗暴、粗野,不大願與別國親善;只要周圍有人享受和平或繁榮,牠便不滿足。在但以理書第二章所見的像中,這以胸和膀臂為銀為象徵的王國(Daniel 2:32),在講解中(Daniel 2:39)被描述為「不及於你」,即不及尼布甲尼撒。關於這王國相當詳盡的記述——岡比西斯的瘋狂計劃和他對埃塞俄比亞人的野蠻暴怒,恰由熊的兇猛所代表;薛西斯之下遠征希臘的噩運之役——其兇猛與愚妄恰由熊所代表;以及薛西斯以後民族性格的墮落——恰由與獅子相比的熊所代表——見 Daniel 2:39 的註釋。凡熟悉該國歷史的人,都不能懷疑這表號的恰當與適用。

(b) 牠在一側起身,或說從伏卧的姿勢起來,彷彿先前處於安息狀態,如今正奮起行動。關於這表號在瑪代波斯身上的應用,歷來有多種解釋。據耶柔米所述,古代希伯來解經家把它解釋為:那國「在一側」,含有分隔之意;即這國自處於猶太之外,或不加害於猶太。Grotius 也如此解釋,意即它沒有傷害猶太——「Judea nihil nocuit」。敘利亞人以法蓮(Ephraem the Syrian)和 Theodoret 把它解釋為:瑪代波斯帝國位於猶太一側,或守在其固有疆界之內,意即它從未像巴比倫那樣把統治權擴及全地。Rosenmuller 把它解釋為:相對於獅子所代表的王國,它居於其側,二者同佔東方諸地。John D. Michaelis 則以為,正如熊起身時一側比另一側抬得更高,瑪代波斯帝國由兩個王國組成,其中一個比另一個更尊崇或更先進。

比較 Lengerke。然而,真正的含義是:如但以理所見,那原先處於安息狀態的民族,如今正為新的征服作準備——這狀態描寫了瑪代波斯帝國在古列征服之後的情形,而且各方面都十分切合:他席捲呂底亞王國等之後,一度安息,如今即將奮起,去征服並制服巴比倫。因此,所指的確切時間約為主前544年(Calmet),那時他既已戰勝瑪代人,確保了對呂底亞的征服和克羅伊斯(Croesus)的廢黜,正在謀劃巴比倫的毀滅。這段安息期約持續一年;正是在這時,聯合帝國以側身起立的熊的形像出現,奮起要去進行新的征服。

(c) 獸口中的肋骨。如上所述,這當適切地指先前的某次征服——因為這樣出現的熊,表明已有別的動物被牠制伏殺死、撕碎。這裏所象徵的權勢若曾在先前的戰爭中得勝、撕裂過列國或萬民,這表號便得了應驗。這描述適用於攻擊巴比倫之前、或把統治權擴及巴比倫並確立為瑪代波斯諸國之前的瑪代波斯權勢,這是無人能懷疑的。比較 Daniel 2:39 的註釋。人們通常以為,古列不經戰爭便繼承了瑪代的王位。但事實遠非如此——儘管那部可視為傳奇的《Cyropaedia》如此描寫。然而,在 Xenophon 的《Anabasis》中,他憑武力征服瑪代的事實得到明確承認(iii. 4, 7; iii. 12)。Herodotus、Ctesias、Isocrates 和 Strabo 也都同意這一事實。底格里斯河上游是一次戰役的所在,那裏的拉里薩(Larissa)和米斯皮拉(Mespila)二城被古列攻取。從 Strabo 我們得知,決定性的戰役正是在古列後來在波斯建造其都城帕薩爾加代(Pasargardae)的同一地點進行的。見 Kitto, Cyclo., art. "Cyrus"。除此以外,我們還當記得古列在呂底亞等地眾所周知的征服;這樣,這表號的恰當性便顯而易見。「三」這數字在表號中是否有意義,並不能確定;但它或許可能指古列向巴比倫發動攻勢時,實際處於其統治之下的波斯、瑪代、呂底亞三個王國。

(d) 「起來吞吃多肉」的命令。凡把這話視為對瑪代波斯權勢所發的人,都不能不看出其恰當——這權勢制伏了巴比倫,把世界相當大的一部分置於其統治之下,並在大流士和薛西斯之下,把它的百萬大軍傾瀉於希臘。因此,這裏所用的表號,是所能採用的最鮮明、最恰當的表號之一;它所指的就是這王國,而且它在一切細節上都得了明確的應驗,這是無可懷疑的。

英文原文

And, behold, another beast, a second, like to a bear - That is, after the lion had appeared, and he had watched it until it had undergone these surprising transformations. There are several circumstances, also, in regard to this symbol, all of which, it is to be supposed, were significant, and all of which demand explication before it is attempted to apply them.

(a) The animal seen: the bear. For a full description of the bear, see Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 9: The animal is well known, and has properties quite distinct from the lion and other animals. There was doubtless some reason why this symbol was employed to denote a particular kingdom, and there was something in the kingdom that corresponded with these peculiar properties, as there was in the case of the lion. The bear might, in some respects, have been a proper representative of Babylon, but it would not in all nor in the main respects. According to Bochart (Hiefoz, vol. i. p. 812), the bear is distinguished mainly for two things, cunning and ferocity. Aristotle says that the bear is greedy as well as silly and foolhardy. (Wemyss, Key to the Symbolic Language of Scripture.) The name in Hebrew is taken from his grumbling or growling. Compare Isaiah 19:11 :

"We roar all like bears."

Compare Horace, Epod. 16, 51:

"Nec vespertinus circumgemit ursus ovile."

Virgil mentions their ferocity:

"Atque in praesepibus ursi Saevire."

  • AEn. vii. 17.

The bear is noted as especially fierce when hungry, or when robbed of its whelps. Jerome (on Hosea 13:8) remarks, "It is said by those who have studied the nature of wild beasts, that none among them is more ferocious than the bear when deprived of its young, or when hungry." Compare 2 Samuel 17:8; Proverbs 17:12; Hosea 13:8. The characteristics of the kingdom, therefore, that would be denoted by the bear would be ferocity, roughness, fierceness in war, especially when provoked; a spirit less manly and noble than that denoted by the lion; severe in its treatment of enemies, with a mixture of fierce and savage cunning.

(b) Its rising up on one of its sides: "and it raised up itself on one side." The Chaldee word used here (שׁטר sheṭar) occurs nowhere else. It means side (Gesenius), and would be applied here to the side of an animal, as if he lifted up one side before the other when he rose. The Latin Vulgate renders it, in parte stetit. The Greek (Walton), έις μέρος ἕν ἐστάθη eis meros hen estathē - "it stood on one part;" or, as Thompson renders it, "he stood half erect." The Codex Chisianus, ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλευροῦ ἐστάθη epi tou henos pleurou estathē - "it stood upon one side." Maurer renders this, "on one of its forefeet it was recumbent, and stood on the other," and says that this is the figure exhibited on one of the stones found in Babylon, an engraving of which may be seen in Munter, Religion d. Babyl. p. 112. The animal referred to here, as found in Babylon, says Lengerke, "lies kneeling on the right forefoot, and is in the act of rising on the left foot." Bertholdt and Havernick understand this as meaning that the animal stood on the hindfeet, with the forepart raised, as the bear is said to do; but probably the true position is that referred to by Maurer and Lengerke, that the animal was in the act of raising itself up from a recumbent posture, and rested on one of its forefeet while the other was reached out, and the body on that side was partially raised. This position would naturally denote a kingdom that had been quiet and at rest, but that was now rousing itself deliberately for some purpose, as of conquest or war - as the bear that had been couching down would rise when hungry, or when going forth for prey.

(c) The ribs in its mouth: "and it had three ribs in the mouth of it between the teeth of it." Bertholdt understands this of fangs or tusks - or fangs crooked or bent like ribs, p. 451, But the proper meaning of the Chaldee עלע ‛ala‛ is the same as the Hebrew צלע tsēlâ‛ - "a rib." - Gesenius. The Latin Vulgate is, tres ordines - three rows; the Syriac and the Greek, three ribs. This would be sufficiently characteristic of a bear, and the attitude of the animal here seems to be that it had killed some other animal, and had, in devouring it, torn out three ribs from its side, and now held them in its mouth. It was slowly rising from a recumbent posture, with these ribs in its mouth, and about to receive a command to go forth and devour much flesh. The number three, in this place, Lengerke supposes to be a round number, without any special significancy; others suppose that it denotes the number of nations or kingdoms which the people here represented by the bear had overcome. Perhaps this latter would be the more obvious idea as suggested by the symbol, but it is not necessary, in order to a proper understanding of a symbol, to press such a point too closely. The natural idea which would be suggested by this part of the symbol would be that of a kingdom or people of a fierce and rough character having already subdued some, and then, after reposing, rising up with the trophies of its former conquests to go forth to new victories, or to overcome others. The symbol would be a very striking one to represent a conquering nation in such a posture.

(d) The command given to this beast: "and they said thus unto it, Arise, devour much flesh." That is, it was said to it; or some one having authority said it. A voice was heard commanding it to go forth and devour. This command is wholly in accordance with the nature of the bear. The bear is called by Aristotle σαρκοφαγῶν sarkofagōn, flesh-eater, and ξῶον πάμφαγον xōon pamphagon, a beast devouring everything (Hist. Nat. viii. 5), and no better description could be given of it. As a symbol, this would properly be applicable to a nation about receiving, as it were, a command from God to go forth to wider conquests than it had already made; to arouse itself from its repose and to achieve new triumphs.

The application of this symbol was not explained by the angel to Daniel; but if the former pertained to Babylon, there can be little difficulty in understanding to what this is to be applied. It is evidently to what succeeded the Babylonian - the Medo-Persian, the kingdom ruled successively by Cyrus, Cambyses, Smerdis, Darius, Xerxes, Artaxerxes, and Darius Nothus, until it was overthrown by Alexander the Great. The only inquiry now is as to the pertinency of the symbol here employed to represent this kingdom.

(a) The symbol of the bear. As already seen, the bear would denote any fierce, rough, overbearing, and arbitrary kingdom, and it is clear that while it might have applicability to any such kingdom, it would better represent that of Medo-Persia than the lion would, for while, in some respects, either symbol would be applicable to either nation, the Medo-Persian did not stand so decidedly at the head of nations as the Babylonian. As to its character, however, the bear was not an inappropriate symbol. Taking the whole nation together, it was fierce and rough, and unpolished, little disposed to friendliness with the nations, and dissatisfied while any around it had peace or prosperity. In the image seen in Dan. ii., this kingdom, denoted by the breast and arms of silver Daniel 7:32, is described in the explanation Daniel 7:39 as "inferior to thee;" that is, to Nebuchadnezzar. For a sufficiently full account of this kingdom - of the mad projects of Cambyses, and his savage rage against the Ethiopians - well represented by the ferocity of the bear; of the ill-starred expedition to Greece under Xerxes - an expedition in its fierceness and folly well represented by the bear, and of the degeneracy of the national character after Xerxes - well represented by the bear as compared with the lion, see the notes at Daniel 2:39. No one acquainted with the history of that nation can doubt the propriety and applicability of the emblem.

(b) The rising up on its side, or from a recumbent posture, as if it had been in a state of repose, and was now arousing itself for action. Different interpretations have been adopted of this emblem as applicable to the Medo-Persians. The ancient Hebrew interpreters, as Jerome remarks, explain it as meaning that that kingdom was "on one side" in the sense of separate; that is, that this kingdom kept itself aloof from Judea, or did not inflict injury on it. Thus also Grotius explains it as meaning that it did not injure Judea - Judea nihil nocuit." Ephraern the Syrian, and Theodoret, explain it as meaning that the empire of the Medo-Persians was situated on the side of Judea, or held itself within its proper bounds, in the sense that it never extended its dominion, like Babylon, over the whole earth. Rosenmuller explains it as meaning that in relation to the kingdom represented by the lion, it was at its side, both occupying the regions of the East. John D. Michaelis understands it as denoting that, as the bear was raising itself up, one part being more raised than the other, the Medo-Persian empire was composed of two kingdoms, one of which was more exalted or advanced than the other.

Compare Lengerke. The true meaning however, is that, as seen by Daniel, the nation that had been in a state of repose was now preparing itself for new conquests - a state descriptive of, and in every way quite applicable to the condition of the Medo-Persian empire, after the conquests by Cyrus, as he overran the kingdom of Lydia, etc., then reposing, and now about arousing to the conquest and subjugation of Babylon. The precise time, therefore, indicated would be about 544 b.c. (Calmer), when, having overcome the Medes, and having secured the conquest of Lydia, and the dethronement of Croesus, he is meditating the destruction of Babylon. This interval of repose lasted about a year, and it is at this time that the united empire is seen, under the image of the bear rising on its side, arousing itself to go forth to new conquests.

(c) The ribs in the mouth of the beast. This, as above remarked, would properly refer to some previous conquest - as a bear appearing in that manner would indicate that some other animal had been overcome and slain by him, and torn in pieces. The emblem would be fulfilled if the power here symbolized had been successful in former wars, and had rent kingdoms or people asunder. That this description would apply to the Medo-Persian power before its attack on Babylon, or before extending its dominion over Babylon, and its establishment as the Medo-Persian kingdoms, no one can doubt. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:39. It has been commonly supposed that Cyrus succeeded to the throne of Media without war. But this is far from being the case - though so represented in what may be regarded as the romance of the Cyropaedia In the Anabasis of Xenophon, however, the fact of his having subdued Media by arms is distinctly admitted, Daniel 3:4, Daniel 3:7, Daniel 3:12. Herodotus, Ctesias, Isocrates, and Strabo, all agree also in the fact that it was so. The Upper Tigris was the seat of one campaign, where the cities of Larissa and Mespila were taken by Cyrus. From Strabo we learn that the decisive battle was fought on the spot where Cyrus afterward built Pasargardae, in Persia, for his capital. See Kitto, Cyclo., art. "Cyrus." In addition to this, we are to remember the well-known conquests of Cyrus in Lydia and elsewhere, and the propriety of the emblem will be apparent. It may not be certain that the number three is significant in the emblem, but it is possible that there may have been reference to the three kingdoms of Persia, Media, and Lydia, that were actually under the dominion of Cyrus when the aggressive movement was made on Babylon.

(d) The command to "arise and devour much flesh." No one can fail to see the appropriateness of this, considered as addressed to the Medo-Persian power - that power which subdued Babylon; which brought under its dominion a considerable part of the world, and which, under Darius and Xerxes, poured its million on Greece. The emblem used here is, therefore, one of the most striking and appropriate that could be employed, and it cannot be doubted that it had reference to this kingdom, and that, in all the particulars, there was a clear fulfillment.

6

Daniel 7:6

開啟正文

此後我觀看,又有一獸如豹——即如前所述,在熊出現之後——表明這是一個繼起的王國或權勢。如今出現的這獸是一個怪獸;而且如前例一樣,關於這個象徵,也有幾點需要解釋才能明白。把但以理所見的這動物的形貌呈現在我們眼前,也許有助於我們對此處的象徵形成正確的概念。

(a) 動物本身:「豹」。此處所用的 נמר(nemar)——希伯來文作 נמר(nâmêr)——指豹,因斑點得名。這是廣為人知的猛獸,以嗜血和兇殘著稱,這些特性尤見於母豹。聖經提到這動物作為以下事物的象徵,或說它具有以下特性:

(1)尊貴僅次於獅子——本性大體與獅子相同。比較 Bochart, Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii.。因此,聖經常把獅子與豹並提。比較 Jeremiah 5:6; Hosea 13:7。並見旁經《便西拉智訓》28:23。Homer 也把二者並提:

Ὄυτε οἶν παρδάλιος τόσσον μένος, ὄυτε λέοντος.

(Oute oun pardalios tosson menos, oute leontos.)

「豹與獅子都沒有這樣的力量。」

(2)以兇殘、兇猛的天性著稱,與溫馴的家畜相對。Isaiah 11:6:「豹子必與山羊羔同臥。」在 Jeremiah 5:6,它與獅子和狼同列:「林中的獅子必害死他們,晚上的豺狼必滅裂他們,豹子要在城外窺伺他們。」比較 Hosea 13:7。

(3)以迅速敏捷著稱。Habakkuk 1:8:「他的馬比豹更快。」並比較上引 Bochart p. 788 中的古典引文。希臘和羅馬作家常常提到它的疾速——尤其是它撲躍之迅捷。

(4)陰伏伺候,向不加防備的行人猝然撲擊。比較 Hosea 13:7:「又如豹伏在道旁」;即我要「窺伺」(אשׁור 'âshûr)他們。Pliny 論豹也說:Insidunt pardi condensa arborurn, occultatique earurn ramis in prcetereuntia desiliunt——「豹子埋伏在密林中,藏身枝葉間,向經過的動物撲下。」

(5)以斑點為特徵。這動物的一般本性與獅子極為相似。Bochart 所引的一位阿拉伯作家把豹界定為「一種貌似獅子的動物,只是體形較小,皮上有黑色斑點」。這表現用為象徵時的正當含義,當指一個比熊所代表的更為尊貴、但對他國的霸權不及獅子所代表的那樣明確的國家或民族;一個耽於征服、以掠奪他國為生的國家;一個行動迅速、向不設防者猝然撲擊的國家;而其斑點或許表示這國或這民族不是由同質的成分、而是由各種不同民族組成的。見下文應用部分。

(b) 四個翅膀,即「背上有鳥的四個翅膀」。第一獸有鷹的翅膀,但沒有指明數目;這獸有翅膀,數目提到了,卻沒有指明翅膀的種類。兩者無疑都意在表示行動的迅速——快過獅子或豹本身所能恰當表示的。若因一處提到翅膀的種類、另一處提到數目而認為表意有別,則前者大概指更豪邁而寬廣的飛翔,後者指更迅疾的飛翔,由四翅表示。前一種的應驗,當在一個把征服擴展到更廣地域的國家中尋找;後一種,當在一個行動更迅速的國家中尋找。但把這些相似之處推行過遠,也有危險。經文除了說翅膀在獸的背上以外,並未論到翅膀的排列;我們只當設想每邊各有兩個。

(c) 四個頭,即「這獸有四個頭」。這表現必是用來表示:或豹所代表的一個權勢或國家,由如今聯合為一的四個分立權勢或民族組成;或有四個相繼的王或王朝構成其歷史;或這權勢或國家實際顯現——就其顯著特徵而言——為一個有四個頭的分立政權,即分為多個分立的主權。在我看來,三者中任何一個都可以算是這形象設計的恰當而自然的應驗;只是第二種不如其餘兩種恰當,因為頭在獸身上不是相繼出現的——不像第四獸的小角是在十角中間長出來——而是同時存在的。大意是:某一主權以某種方式把四個權力源融合為一,或實際行使同樣的統治,事實上構成有別於他國的一個國度。

(d) 所賦予它的統治權,即「又得了權柄」。即它被立定,在前一國統治之處施行統治,直到另一國——那有十角的獸——繼起為止。

至於這象徵的應用,天使雖未向但以理解釋,只一般地說它代表一個王國(Daniel 7:17),看來卻不會有甚麼大困難,儘管歷來見解略有不同。Maurer、Lengerke 等人把它指瑪代波斯帝國——以為第二個象徵指瑪代國。但反對的理由如此明顯而繁多,在我看來這意見無法成立,因為:

(1)瑪代國在任何正當的意義上並未繼巴比倫之後;

(2)口啣三肋之熊的表現不能恰當地應用於瑪代;

(3)如上所見,第二獸的全部描述與瑪代波斯帝國的歷史完全吻合。

若然,我們自然要在緊接瑪代波斯之後的王國或王朝中尋找這象徵——第三個——的應驗,即亞歷山大大帝所創立的馬其頓王朝或王國;它延伸於巴比倫和瑪代波斯帝國先前所佔的同樣地區,直到被羅馬的征服吞併。我們將發現,一切情節都與這設想相符:

(a) 動物——豹。這動物相對的尊貴、猛獸的性質、行動的迅速、撲向獵物時的跳躍——都與亞歷山大所創立的王國十分吻合。事實上,古人中再沒有別的國家能比它更恰當地應用這象徵;而且必須承認,若但以理有意選擇一個代表馬其頓帝國的象徵,他不可能選出比豹更貼切的了。這動物已注意到的一切特性——

(1)尊貴僅次於獅子;

(2)以兇猛著稱;

(3)以迅速為特徵;

(4)以埋伏伺機、猝然撲向獵物聞名;以及

(5)下文將述的斑點——都與亞歷山大的特性、他在列國中的行動、以及他在東方建立的國家吻合。

(b) 四個翅膀。這恰當地代表亞歷山大征服的迅速,因為在東方再沒有比他更迅速的征服。前面已注意到,與第一獸未提翅膀數目相對,豹有四個翅膀:一個表示更寬廣的飛翔,另一個表示更迅疾的飛翔;前者與尼布甲尼撒的征服、後者與亞歷山大的征服十分吻合。

(c) 連於一身的四個頭。眾所周知,亞歷山大死時,他的帝國留給了他的四位將領,他們各自成為同樣多個分立政權的首腦,卻都出於同源,事實上都出自馬其頓帝國。這一事實用一個有四頭的獸來表現,比用四隻分立的獸更恰當;就是說,頭既代表權柄或政權,一個帝國如今實際上由四個分立的權柄統治。這一個帝國,作為馬其頓帝國而言,延續其統治直到被羅馬人吞併;就是說,那有別於巴比倫或瑪代波斯、具有與它們不同的特性、引進新秩序的馬其頓權勢或政權,即使在這權勢已經分裂、以分立主權的不同形式行使之後,仍然延續。事實是,在這帝國的締造者亞歷山大死時,「亞歷山大的兄弟腓力·阿里達烏斯和他與羅克桑娜所生的幼子,被眾將領立為繼承人,佩爾狄卡斯(Perdiccas)受任攝政。帝國分為三十三個行省,分派給同樣多的將領。由此引發一連串血腥而具毀滅性的戰爭,隨之而來的是一段幾乎世界史上無與倫比的混亂、無政府與罪惡的時期。主前301年安提柯(Antigonus)敗亡的伊普索斯之戰以後,帝國分為四國——色雷斯和比提尼亞歸呂西馬科斯(Lysimachus);敘利亞和東方歸西流基(Seleucus);埃及歸多利買·索特爾;馬其頓歸卡桑德(Cassander)。」——Lyman, Hist. Chart.。正是這樣從亞歷山大所建一帝國中生出的四個權勢,由四個頭清楚地表示出來。

(d) 所賦予它的統治權。亞歷山大和馬其頓王朝得了與此完全相稱的統治權,這是無人能否認的。事實上,世界的統治權實際上已讓與這國。

(e) 還有一點情節須加注意,雖然我們未必能在任何具體事件中為它尋求精確的應驗。這就是豹以斑點為標記這一事實——許多人認為,這在亞歷山大帝國內有眾多不同質的民族這一事實上得了應驗。Bochart(Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii. p. 789)便說:「豹的斑點指他所統治各民族風俗之各異。這些民族中,歐洲除馬其頓人外,還有希利尼人、色雷斯人、伊利里亞人;非洲有利比亞人、埃及人和穴居人(Troglodites);亞洲則幾乎包括直到恆河的所有民族。」但即使不堅持這一點,凡把其他顯然有意作為象徵的細節加以比較的人,不能不看出它們在馬其頓帝國中得了完全的應驗。

英文原文

After this I beheld, and, lo, another, like a leopard - That is, as before, after the bear had appeared - indicating that this was to be a succeeding kingdom or power. The beast which now appeared was a monster, and, as in the former cases, so in regard to this, there are several circumstances which demand explanation in order to understand the symbol. It may assist us, perhaps, in forming a correct idea of the symbol here introduced to have before us a representation of the animal as it appeared to Daniel.

(a) The animal itself: "a leopard." The word used here - נמר nemar - or in Hebrew נמר nâmêr - denotes a panther or leopard, so called from his spots. This is a well-known beast of prey, distinguished for blood-thirstiness and cruelty, and these characteristics are especially applicable to the female panther. The animal is referred to in the Scriptures as emblematic of the following things, or as having the following characteristics:

(1) As next in dignity to the lion - of the same general nature. Compare Bochart, Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii. Thus the lion and the panther, or leopard, are often united in the Scriptures. Compare Jeremiah 5:6; Hosea 13:7. See also in the Apocrypha, Ecclesiasticus 28:23. So also they are united in Homer, r

Ὄυτε οἶν παρδάλιος τόσσον μένος, ὄυτε λέοντος.

Oute oun pardalios tosson menos, oute leontos.

"Neither had the leopard nor the lion such strength."

(2) As distinguished for cruelty, or a fierce nature, as contrasted with the gentle and tame animal. Isaiah 11:6, "and the leopard shall lie down with the kid." In Jeremiah 5:6, it is compared with the lion and the wolf: "A lion out of the forest shall slay them, and a wolf of the evenings shall spoil them, a leopard shall watch over their cities." Compare Hosea 13:7.

(3) As distinguished for swiftness or fleetness. Habakkuk 1:8 : "their horses are swifter than the leopards." Compare also the quotations from the classics in Bochart as above, p. 788. His fleetness is often referred to - the celerity of his spring or bound especially - by the Greek and Roman writers.

(4) As insidious, or as lying in wait, and springing unexpectedly upon the unwary traveler. Compare Hosea 13:7 : "As a leopard by the way will I observe them;" that is, I will "watch" (אשׁור 'âshûr) them. So Pliny says of leopards: Insidunt pardi condensa arborurn, occultatique earurn ramis in prcetereuntia desiliunt.

(5) They are characterized by their spots. In the general nature of the animal there is a strong resemblance to the lion. Thus, an Arabic writer quoted by Bochart, deflates the leopard to be "an animal resembling the lion, except that it is smaller, and has a skin marked by black spots." The proper idea in this representation, when used as a symbol, would be of a nation or kingdom that would have more nobleness than the one represented by the bear, but a less decisive headship over others than that represented by the lion; a nation that, was addicted to conquest, or that preyed upon others; a nation rapid in its movements, and springing upon others unawares, and perhaps in its spots denoting a nation or people made up, not of homogeneous elements, but of various different people. See below in the application of this.

(b) The four wings: which had upon the back of it four wings of a fowl. The first beast was seen with the wings of an eagle, but without any specified number; this appears with wings, but without specifying any particular kind of wings, though the number is mentioned. In both of them celerity of movement is undoubtedly intended - celerity beyond what would be properly denoted by the animal itself the lion or the leopard. If there is a difference in the design of the representation, as there would seem to be by mentioning the kind of wings in the one case, and the number in the other, it is probable that the former would denote a more bold and extended flight; the latter a flight more rapid, denoted by the four wings. We should look for the fulfillment of the former in a nation that extended its conquests over a broader space; in the latter, to a nation that moved with more celerity. But there is some danger of pressing these similitudes too far. Nothing is said in the passage about the arrangement of the wings, except that they were on the back of the animal. It is to be supposed that there were two on each side.

(c) The four heads: "the beast had also four heads." This representation must have been designed to signify either that the one power or kingdom denoted by the leopard was composed of four separate powers or nations now united in one; or that there were four successive kings or dynasties that made up its history; or that the power or kingdom actually appeared, as seen in its prevailing characteristic, as a distinct dominion, as having four heads, or as being divided into so many separate sovereignties. It seems to me that either one of these would be a proper and natural fulfillment of the design of the image, though the second suggested would be less proper than either of the others, as the heads appeared on the animal not in succession - as the little horn sprung up in the midst of the other ten, as represented in the fourth beast - but existed simultaneously. The general idea would be, that in some way the one particular sovereignty had four sources of power blended into one, or actually exerted the same kind of dominion, and constituted, in fact, the one kingdom as distinguished from the others.

(d) The dominion given to it: "and dominion was given to it." That is, it was appointed to rule where the former had ruled, and until it should be succeeded by another - the beast with the ten horns.

In regard to the application of this, though the angel did not explain it to Daniel, except in general that a kingdom was represented by it. Daniel 7:17, it would seem that there could be little difficulty, though there has been some variety in the views entertained. Maurer, Lengerke, and some others, refer it to the Medo-Persian empire - supposing that the second symbol referred to the kingdom of Media. But the objections to this are so obvious, and so numerous, that it seems to me the opinion cannot be entertained, for

(1) the kingdom of Media did not, in any proper sense, succeed that of Babylon;

(2) the representation of the bear with three ribs has no proper application to Media;

(3) the whole description, as we have seen above, of the second beast, accords entirely with the history of the Medo-Persian empire.

If this be so, then we naturally look for the fulfillment of this symbol - the third head - in the kingdom or dynasty that followed directly that of Medo-Persia - the Macedonian dynasty or kingdom founded by Alexander the Great, extending over the same countries before occupied by Babylon and the Medo-Persian empire, and continuing until it was swallowed up in the conquests of Rome. We shall find that all the circumstances agree with this supposition:

(a) The animal - the leopard. The comparative nobleness of the animal; a beast of prey; the celerity of its movements; the spring or bound with which it leaps upon its prey - all agree well with the kingdom of which Alexander was the founder. Indeed there was no other kingdom among the ancients to which it could be better applied; and it will be admitted that, on the supposition that it was the design of Daniel to choose a symbol that would represent the Macedonian empire, he could not have selected one that was better adapted to it than the leopard. All the characteristics of the animal that have been noticed -

(1) as next in dignity to the lion:

(2) as distinguished for a fierce nature;

(3) as characterized by fleetness;

(4) as known for lying in wait, and springing suddenly upon its prey; and

(5) in the point to be noticed soon - their spots - all agree with the characteristics of Alexander, and his movements among the nations, and with the kingdom that was founded by him in the East.

(b) The four wings. These represent well the rapidity of the conquests of Alexander, for no more rapid conquests were ever made than were his in the East. It was noticed that the leopard had four wings, as contrasted with the first beast, in reference to which the number is not mentioned: the one denoting a broader flight, and the other a more rapid one; and the one agrees well with the conquests of Nebuchadnezzar, and the other with those of Alexander.

(c) The four heads united to one body. It is well known that when Alexander died, his empire was left to four of his generals, and that they came to be at the head of as many distinct dominions, yet all springing from the same source, and all, in fact, out of the Macedonian empire. This fact would not be so well represented by four distinct and separate animals, as by one animal with four heads; that is, as the head represents authority or dominion, one empire, in fact, now ruling by four distinct authorities. The one empire, considered as Macedonian, continued its sway until it was swallowed up by the Romans; that is, the Macedonian power or dominion as distinct from that of Babylon or Medo-Persia; as having characteristics unlike these; as introducing a new order of things, continued, though that power was broken up and exercised under distinct manifestations of sovereignty. The fact was, that, at the death of Alexander, to whom the founding of this empire was owing, "Philip Aridaeus, brother of Alexander, and his infant son by Roxana, were appointed by the generals of the army to succeed, and Perdiccas was made regent. The empire was divided into thirty-three governments, distributed among as many general officers. Hence arose a series of bloody, desolating wars, and a period of confusion, anarchy, and crime ensued, that is almost without a parallel in the history of the world. After the battle of Ipsus, 301 b.c., in which Antigonus was defeated, the empire was divided into four kingdoms - Thrace and Bithynia under Lysimachus; Syria and the East under Seleucus; Egypt, under Ptolemy Soter; and Macedonia under Cassander." - Lyman Hist. Chart. It was these four powers, thus springing out of the one empire founded by Alexander, that was clearly represented by. the four heads.

(d) The dominion given to it. No one can doubt that a dominion was given to Alexander and the Macedonian dynasty, which would fully correspond with this. In fact the dominion of the world was practically conceded to that kingdom.

(e) There is only one other circumstance to be noticed, though perhaps we are not to seek an exact accomphshment for that in any specific events. It is the fact tbat the leopard is marked by spots - a circumstance which many have supposed had a fulfillment in the fact that numerous nations, not homogeneous, were found in the empire of Alexander. So Bochart, Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii. p. 789, says: "The spots of the leopard refer to the different customs of the nations over which he ruled. Among these, besides the Macedonians, Greeks, Thracians, and Illyrians, in Europe, there were in Africa the Libyans, Egyptians, and Troglodites; in Asia, almost all the nations to the Ganges." But, without insisting on this, no one can compare the other particulars which were clearly designed to be symbolic, without perceiving that they had a full accomplishment in the Macedonian empire.

7

Daniel 7:7

開啟正文

其後我在夜間的異象中觀看——其他幾隻獸也是在夢中所見(Daniel 7:1);而這大概也是同一夜裏同一個夢的後續部分,因為整個異象顯然是在一次夢中從先知面前經過的。諸獸先後相繼出現、他一隻接一隻地看見,這一事實表明諸國的承繼。這些國不是同時並存於地上,而是要按這裏所指示的次序一國接一國興起,儘管它們在某幾方面要佔據同一片疆土。如今出現的這獸特有的性情、角的數目、新角的長出、這獸的威勢與可怖,以及它的統治在地上長久的延續,都吸引並牢牢抓住了但以理的注意,使他對這獸的形貌作了更細緻的描述,並促使他特別向天使請求解明異象這一部分的含義(Daniel 7:19)。

見第四獸——這獸有其獨特的特徵,這一切都當視為象徵,也都需要解釋,我們才能對這象徵的性質與用意有正確的認識。

正如對前三獸一樣,對這獸也宜先解釋象徵各部分的含義,然後在解說部分(Daniel 7:19及以下)探究其應用。這象徵的細節比先前任何一個都更多、更醒目、也更重要。這些細節如下(Daniel 7:7-11):

(a)動物本身(Daniel 7:7):「第四獸甚是可怕,極其強壯」。這裏不像先前的獅、熊、豹那樣給出獸的形態或本性,而是留給想像去補足。它比其他各獸樣貌更可怖,顯然是一個無法以單一名目稱呼的怪物。這裏用來描述這獸的字眼——「甚是可怕」、「極其強壯」、「大有力量」——近乎同義,堆疊並列,為要對這獸所激起的恐怖給人深刻的印象。其大意不容置疑,因為 Daniel 7:23 解釋它是指一個「必吞吃全地,並且踐踏咬碎」的國。作為象徵,它表示某種遠比前述更可畏可怖的權力;轄域更廣;性情更嚴酷、更具壓迫性;徵斂更苛刻;更徹底地毀滅他人的自由;比前幾國更憑力量與恐怖、較少憑詭術與權謀而推進。這特徵貫穿整個象徵,顯而易見。

(b)牙齒(Daniel 7:7):「有大鐵牙」。不僅是別的動物也可能有的牙或獠牙,而是鐵作的牙。這是怪物的特徵,表明這裏所象徵的統治權中必有非常獨特之處。牙的用處在於吃或吞;這裏的象徵是吞吃與撕裂——這樣的牙若在猛獸口中,彷彿要把面前的一切撕裂吞盡。這同樣表示一個極其凶暴的國、一個野蠻兇殘的國、一個對萬國都格外可畏的國。舉例說明,可比較 Jeremiah 15:12;Micah 4:13。按 Daniel 7:23 的解釋,這裏所指的國「必吞吃全地」。牙——大牙——常用作殘忍或吞吃之敵的象徵。因此 Proverbs 30:14 說:「有一宗人,牙如劍,齒如刀,要吞滅地上的困苦人和世間的窮乏人。」大衛也用這字表示暴君的殘忍:「你打擊了我一切仇敵的腮骨,把惡人的牙齒打斷」(Psalm 3:7);「他們的牙齒是槍、箭」(Psalm 57:4);「神啊,求你敲碎他們口中的牙齒!耶和華啊,求你敲掉少壯獅子的大牙!」(Psalm 58:6)。

(c)腳的踐踏(Daniel 7:7):「吞吃嚼碎,所剩下的用腳踐踏」。就是說,像猛獸一樣,凡它不能吞吃的,就用腳踏碎在地上。這表示一種為毀滅而毀滅的性情或目的,或在別無所圖之處仍要毀滅。它表明狂怒與暴怒,表明粉碎面前一切、要得普世統治的決心;適用於那單為征服而征服、粉碎他國的國家,或因不願別國存在並享受自由——即使自己並無利益可圖——而如此行的國家。

(d)牠與先前一切獸不同(Daniel 7:7):「這獸與前三獸大不相同」。先知沒有具體說明牠在哪幾方面不同,因為他並未嘗試描述牠的外貌。牠不是獅,不是熊,也不是豹,但他沒有確說牠究竟是甚麼。也許牠是這樣一個怪物,以致沒有動物可與相比。然而他仍陳述了牠幾處不同之點——如十角、小角、鐵牙等——但整體形象仍留給想像去補足。這意思必然是:這獸所代表的第四國,將與先前諸國在本質上不同;我們必須在那些使它有別於他國的特徵中尋找應驗。這分別必是顯著的——必大於國與國之間一般的差異。

(e)十角(Daniel 7:7):「頭有十角」。即先知看見牠頭上有十角,作為這獸的特徵。角是權力的象徵,在但以理書(Daniel 7:7-8、7:20、7:24;Daniel 8:3-9、8:20-22)和啟示錄(Revelation 5:6;Revelation 13:1、13:11;Revelation 17:3、17:12、17:16)中常用作表號。角之所以用作象徵,是因為有角之獸的大力量就在於角。因此 Amos 6:13 說:

「你們喜愛虛浮的事,自誇說:我們不是憑自己的力量取了角嗎?」

(希伯來文作「角」。)

Deuteronomy 33:17 也是如此:

「他的俊美如頭生的公牛犢, 他的角如野牛的角; 他必以此牴觸萬民,直到地極; 這是以法蓮的萬萬, 是瑪拿西的千千。」——Wemyss。

在 1 Kings 22:11,我們看見角被用於假先知西底家所行的象徵性行動:「基拿拿的兒子西底家造了兩個鐵角,說:『耶和華如此說:你要用這角牴觸亞蘭人,直到將他們滅盡。』」在 Zechariah 1:18,先知所見的四角被說成是那分散毀滅猶太人的四大權勢。比較 Wemyss《聖經象徵語言之鑰》論「角」一條。這裏象徵的含義不容置疑,因為本章後文 Daniel 7:24 有了解釋:「至於那十角,就是從這國中必興起的十王」。按這解釋看來,它們似乎也是指那國歷史中某個時期要從那國「興起」或長出的十王。「至於那十角,就是從這國中必興起的十王」;這不是說那國本身要由別的十國合併統一而成,而是說從那一國之內要長出十個將執行統治的權柄,或說那一國的權力最終要落於十個這樣的權柄之中。但以理初見這獸時,似乎看見這些角已附在獸身上;但後文的解釋是:這些角是那一國的權力終必施展之方式的表號,或說必有十王或十個王朝從它興起。因此,我們自然要在某一個粉碎萬國的巨權大國中尋找這應驗——這國在保持同樣總體特徵的同時,要從中長出十王、十王朝或十國,權力便集中於其中。

(f)小角的長出(Daniel 7:8):「我正觀看這些角,見其中又長起一個小角」。關於這一點,有幾件事當注意:

(1)他「觀看這些角」的事實;即他注視着它們,直到另一角在其中間長起來。這暗示他初見這怪物時,牠並沒有這樣的角,這角是在他初次看見之後相當久的時間才長出來的——表明這事或許要在那受象徵之國的歷史中很晚才發生。這不是很快就會發生的事。

(2)它是在其他諸角「中間」(ביניהן bēynēyhēn)長出來的——出於同一源頭,屬於同一獸體,因此是同一權力的開展或發揮。這裏的用語並不能確切指定它所佔的位置,但其他諸角似乎緊靠在一起,而這角是從中央、正從它們當中長出來的——暗示所象徵的新統治權不是外來的統治權,而是要從那國本身興起、或似乎是在那國之內成長起來的。

(3)它是一個小角;就是說,起初微小,後來卻長大到足以象徵大權力。這表示所象徵的權力起初微小——逐漸興起。它的應驗不在於征服,不在於革命,不在於王朝更替,也不在於憲制的突變,而在於某個源起微賤、開始軟弱微小、卻漸漸增長的權力——直到憑自身的成長,把先前所行使的一部分權力擠開,佔據其位。我們自然要在國家內部某種權力的增長中尋找它的應驗——那權力源起卑微,慢慢發展,直到吸收了那原在本質上屬於怪物所代表之國的權威的相當部分。

(4)那「角」長大時,其他三角連根被拔出。用來表達這事的詞(אתעקרו 'ethe‛ăqârâv)的確切意思,是它們被連根拔除——如樹被連根拔倒,或根從土中被翻出來。這事的過程似乎是在於生長。那角逐漸長大,擠迫其他諸角,其中一部分便被擠脫而倒下。這公平表明的,不是任何暴力行為,不是任何突發的動盪或革命,而是權力漸進的增長,使原有權力的一部分被挪去,這新權力佔據其位。沒有嚴格意義上的革命,也沒有整個王朝的更替,因為大部分的角仍然存留;而是新權力的逐漸興起,要掌管先前由別人行使的一部分權力,如今便代其行使。「三」這個數目或指十部分中有三部分這樣被吞併,或指雖不確定、卻相當大的部分這樣被吸收。

(5)眼:「這角有眼,像人的眼」。眼表明智慧,因為我們是藉着眼看見事物。以西結異象中輪的輞滿了眼睛(Ezekiel 1:18),象徵智慧。這表示這裏所指的權力必極其精明。我們自然要在這樣的權力中尋找它的應驗:它明智而有智地制定計劃;對政策有宏遠清晰的見解;在謀略和旨意上機敏而有遠見;嫻於外交;或以政治家般的謀劃見長。這部分象徵若單獨存在,任何明智而機敏的執政都可算應驗;但處在這裏、被其他部分環繞,似乎表示它與它們相對照,在政策上以機敏遠見著稱。Lengerke 承襲耶柔米(Jerome),認為這意思是:所指的對象是一個「人」,「因為人的眼比其他動物的眼更敏銳犀利」。但更正確的解釋是上文所說的——它表明智慧、機敏、明察。

(6)口:「有口說誇大的話」。表示驕傲與傲慢的口。Daniel 7:25 解釋這是說:它所指的那位必「向至高者說誇大的話」;就是說,必犯褻瀆之罪。那狂傲、那些僭越的主張、所顯出的那種精神,將要如此之甚,以致實際上就是向神說誇大的話。我們自然要在某個狂傲而褻瀆的權力中尋找這應驗——某個真正褻瀆宗教、敵擋宗教在世上進展與興盛的權力。基西亞努斯抄本(Codex Chisianus)中的七十士譯本在此處加上「並要與聖徒爭戰」;但這話不見於迦勒底原文。然而它與 Daniel 7:25 的解釋頗相吻合。這裏所考察的,已包括本來屬於這象徵——第四獸的象徵——的一切,惟獨 Daniel 7:11 所述的事實除外:那獸被殺,身體損壞,扔在火中焚燒。至於應驗的探究,等到我們考察天使應但以理所請、在 Daniel 7:19-25 所給出的解釋時再談,才是合宜。

英文原文

After this I saw in the night visions - The other beasts were seen also in a dream Daniel 7:1, and this probably in the same night, though as a subsequent part of the dream, for the whole vision evidently passed before the prophet in a single dream. The succession, or the fact that he saw one after the other, indicates a sucession in the kingdoms. They were not to be at the same time upon the earth, but one was to arise after another in the order here indicated, though they were in some respects to occupy the same territory. The singular character of the beast that now appears; the number of the horns; the springing up of a new horn; the might and terror of the beast, and the long duration of its dominion upon the earth, attracted and fixed the attention of Daniel, led him into a more minute description of the appearance of the animal, and induced him particularly to ask an explanation of the angel of the meaning of this part of the vision, Daniel 7:19.

And, behold, a fourth beast - This beast had peculiar characteristics, all of which were regarded as symbolic, and all of which demand explanation in order that we may have a just view of the nature and design of the symbol.

As in reference to the three former beasts, so also in regard to this, it will be proper to explain first the significance of the different parts of the symbol, and then in the exposition (Daniel 7:19, following) to inquire into the application. The particulars of this symbol are more numerous, more striking, and more important than in either of the previous ones. These particulars are the following Daniel 7:7-11 :

(a) The animal itself Daniel 5:7 : "a fourth beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong exceedingly." The form or nature of the beast is not given as in the preceding cases - the lion, the bear, and the leopard - but it is left for the imagination to fill up. It was a beast more terrific in its appearance than either of the others, and was evidently a monster such as could not be designated by a single name. The terms which are used here in describing the beast - "dreadful, terrible, exceedingly strong," are nearly synonymous, and are heaped together in order to give an impressive view of the terror inspired by the beast. There can be no doubt as to the general meaning of this, for it is explained Daniel 7:23 as denoting a kingdom that "should devour the whole earth, and tread it down, and break it in pieces." As a symbol, it would denote some power much more fearful and much more to be dreaded; having a wider dominion; and more stern, more oppressive in its character, more severe in its exactions, and more entirely destroying the liberty of others; advancing more by power and terror, and less by art and cunning, than either. This characteristic is manifest throughout the symbol.

(b) The teeth Daniel 7:7 : "and it had great iron teeth." Not only teeth or tusks, such as other animals may have, but teeth made of iron. This is characteristic of a monster, and shows that there was to be something very peculiar in the dominion that was here symbolized. The teeth are of use to eat or devour; and the symbol here is that of devouring or rending - as a fierce monster with such teeth might be supposed to rend or devour all that was before it. This, too, would denote a nation exceedingly fierce; a nation of savage ferocity; a nation that would be signally formidable to all others. For illustration, compare Jeremiah 15:12; Micah 4:13. As explained in Daniel 7:23, it is said that the kingdom denoted by this would "devour the whole earth." Teeth - great teeth, are often used as the symbols of cruelty, or of a devouring enemy. Thus in Proverbs 30:14 : "There is a generation whose teeth are as swords, and their jaw teeth are as knives, to devour the poor from off the earth, and the needy from among men." So David uses the word to denote the cruelty of tyrants: Psalm 3:7, "Thou hast broken the teeth of the ungodly;" Psalm 57:4, "whose teeth are spears and arrows;" Psalm 58:6, "break their teeth in their mouth; break out the great teeth of the young lions."

(c) The stamping with the feet Daniel 7:7 : "it devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the residue with the feet of it." That is, like a fierce monster, whatever it could not devour it stamped down and crushed in the earth. This indicates a disposition or purpose to destroy, for the sake of destroying, or where no other purpose could be gained. It denotes rage, wrath, a determination to crush all in its way, to have universal dominion; and would be applicable to a nation that subdued and crushed others for the mere sake of doing it, or because it was unwilling that any other should exist and enjoy liberty - even where itself could not hope for any advantage.

(d) The fact that it was different from all that went before it Daniel 7:7 : "and it was diverse from all the beasts that were before it." The prophet does not specify particularly in what respects it was different, for he does not attempt to give its appearance. It was not a lion, a bear, or a leopard, but he does not say precisely what it was. Probably it was such a monster that there were no animals with which it could be compared. He states some circumstances, however, in which it was different - as in regard to the ten horns, the little horn, the iron teeth, etc., but still the imagination is left to fill up the picture in general. The meaning of this must be, that the fourth kingdom, represented by this beast, would be materially different from those which preceded it, and we must look for the fulfillment in some features that would characterize it by which it would be unlike the others. There must be something marked in the difference - something that would be more than the common difference between nations.

(e) The ten horns Daniel 7:7 : "and it had ten horns." That is, the prophet saw on it ten horns as characterizing the beast. The horn is a symbol of power, and is frequently so used as an emblem or symbol in Daniel Dan 7:7-8, Daniel 7:20, Daniel 7:24; Daniel 8:3-9, Daniel 8:20-22 and Revelation Rev 5:6; Revelation 13:1, Revelation 13:11; Revelation 17:3, Revelation 17:12, Revelation 17:16. It is used as a symbol because the great strength of horned animals is found there. Thus in Amos 6:13, it is said:

"Ye that rejoice in a thing of nought,

That say, Have we not taken dominion to ourselves By our own strength?"

(Heb. horns.)

So in Deuteronomy 33:17 :

"His beauty shall be that of a young bull,

And his horns shall be the horns of a rhinoceros:

With these he shall push the people to the extremities of the land:

Such are the ten thousands of Ephraim,

Such the thousands of Manasseh."

  • Wemyss.

So in 1 Kings 22:11, we find horns used in a symbolic action on the part of the false prophet Zedekiah. "He made him horns of iron, and said, Thus saith Jehovah, With these shalt thou push the Syrians, until thou have consumed them." In Zechariah 1:18, the four horns that are seen by the prophet are said to be the four great powers which had scattered and wasted the Jews. Compare Wemyss on the Symbolic Language of Scripture, art. "Horns." There can be no doubt as to the meaning of the symbol here, for it is explained in a subsequent part of the chapter Daniel 7:24, "the ten horns are the ten kings that shall arise." It would seem also, from that explanation, that they were to be ten kings that would "arise" or spring out of that kingdom at some period of its history. "And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise;" that is, not that the kingdom itself would spring out of ten others that would be amalgamated or consolidated into one, but that out of that one kingdom there would spring up ten that would exercise dominion, or in which the power of the one kingdom would be ultimately lodged. Though Daniel appears to have seen these horns as pertaining to the beast when he first saw him, yet the subsequent explanation is, that these horns were emblems of the manner in which the power of that one kingdom would be finally exerted; or that ten kings or dynasties would spring out of it. We are, then, naturally to look for the fulfillment of this in some one great kingdom of huge power that would crush the nations, and from which, while the same general characteristic would remain, there would spring up ten kings, or dynasties, or kingdoms, in which the power would be concentrated.

(f) The springing up of the little horn Daniel 7:8 : "I considered the horns, and, behold, there came up among them another little horn." There are several points to be noticed in regard to this:

(1) The fact that he "considered the horns;" that is, he looked on them until another sprang up among them. This implies that when he first saw the monster, it had no such horn, and that the horn sprang up a considerable time after he first saw it - intimating that it would occur, perhaps, far on in the history of the kingdom that was symbolized. It is implied that it was not an event which would soon occur.

(2) It sprang up "among" the others (ביניהן bēynēyhēn) - starting from the same source, and pertaining to the same animal, and therefore a development or putting forth of the same power. The language used here does not designate, with any degree of certainty, the precise place which it occupied, but it would seem that the others stood close together, and that this sprang out of the center, or from the very midst of them - implying that the new dominion symbolized would not be a foreign dominion, but one that would spring out of the kingdom itself, or that would seem to grow up in the kingdom.

(3) It was a little horn; that is, it was small at first, though subsequently it grew so as to be emblematic of great power. This would denote that the power symbolized would be small at first - springing up gradually. The fulfillment of this would be found, neither in conquest nor in revolution, nor in a change of dynasty, nor in a sudden change of a constitution, but in some power that had an obscure origin, and that was feeble and small at the beginning, yet gradually increasing, until, by its own growth, it put aside a portion of the power before exercised and occupied its place. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in the increase of some power within the state that had a humble origin, and that slowly developed itself until it absorbed a considerable portion of the authority that essentially resided in the kingdom represented by the monster.

(4) In the growth of that "horn," three of the others were plucked up by the roots. The proper meaning of the word used to express this (אתעקרו 'ethe‛ăqârâv) is, that they were rooted out - as a tree is overturned by the roots, or the roots are turned out from the earth. The process by which this was done seems to have been by growth. The gradual increase of the horn so crowded on the others that a portion of them was forced out, and fell. What is fairly indicated by this was not any act of violence, or any sudden convulsion or revolution, but such a gradual growth of power that a portion of the original power was removed, and this new power occupied its place. There was no revolution, properly so-called; no change of the whole dynasty, for a large portion of the horns remained, but the gradual rise of a new power that would wield a portion of that formerly wielded by others, and that would now wield the power in its place. The number three would either indicate that three parts out of the ten were absorbed in this way, or that a considerable, though an indefinite portion, was thus absorbed.

(5) The eyes: "and behold, in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man." Eyes denote intelligence, as we see objects by their aid. The rims of the wheels in Ezekiel's vision were full of eyes Ezekiel 1:18, as symbolic of intelligence. This would denote that the power here referred to would be remarkably sagacious. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in a power that laid its plans wisely and intelligently; that had large and clear views of policy; that was shrewd and far-seeing in its counsels and purposes; that was skilled in diplomacy; or, that was eminent for statesman-like plans. This part of the symbol, if it stood alone, would find its fulfillment in any wise and shrewd administration; as it stands here, surrounded by others, it would seem that this, as contrasted with them, was characteristically shrewd and far-seeing in its policy. Lengerke, following Jerome, supposes that this means that the object referred to would be a man, "as the eyes of men are keener and sharper than those of other animals." But the more correct interpretation is that above referred to - that it denotes intelligence, shrewdness, sagacity.

(6) The mouth: "and a mouth speaking great things." A mouth indicating pride and arrogance. This is explained in Daniel 7:25, as meaning that he to whom it refers would "speak great words against the Most High;" that is, would be guilty of blasphemy. There would be such arrogance, and such claims set up, and such a spirit evinced, that it would be in fact a speaking against God. We naturally look for the fulfillment of this to some haughty and blaspheming power; some power that would really blaspheme religion, and that would be opposed to its progress and prosperity in the world. The Septuagint, in the Codex Chisianus, adds here, "and shall make war against the saints;" but these words are not found in the original Chaldee. They accord, however, well with the explanation in Daniel 7:25. What has been here considered embraces all that pertains properly to this symbol - the symbol of the fourth beast - except the fact stated in Daniel 7:11, that the beast was slain, and that his body was given to the burning flame. The inquiry as to the fulfillment will be appropriate when we come to consider the explanation given at the request of Daniel, by the angel, in Daniel 7:19-25.

9

Daniel 7:9

開啟正文

我觀看——「我繼續觀看這些奇異的景象,並思索這些變化。」這暗示這一切事發生之前,已經過了一段時間。他繼續觀看,直到看見對這第四獸特別作出了莊嚴的審判,彷彿神帶着祂的威嚴和榮耀出現,要宣判那審判,並終結那獸的權勢和驕橫。

見有寶座設立——迦勒底文的詞(כרסון kâresâvân)本義為寶座,即君王所坐的座位。單就這詞而論,既可指屬世君王所佔的寶座,也可指神的寶座。這裏使用複數,至少似乎表明所指並非神的寶座,而是另一些寶座。Maurer 與 Lengerke 認為,這裏暗指在那將要宣判的莊嚴審判中屬天存在者所坐的寶座——神的寶座,以及隨同祂前來參與莊嚴審判的天上眾居民各自的寶座或座位。Lengerke 徵引 1 Kings 22:19;Isaiah 6:1;Job 1:6 及 Revelation 5:11-12 作說明。但這詞本身既可恰當地應用於神的寶座,也同樣可應用於屬世君王的寶座。英譯本中「被傾覆」(רמיו remı̂yv)一語,似乎假定在這時期有一些寶座被推倒或傾覆,而那莊嚴的審判將隨之而來,或是由此而起。

按照 Gesenius 的解釋,迦勒底文的詞(רמא remâh)意為拋、擲(Daniel 3:21、3:24;Daniel 6:16-17);也意為安放、設置,例如寶座;以及攤派貢賦(Ezra 7:24)。拉丁文武加大譯本作 throni positi sunt——「寶座被安放」;希臘文譯本作 ἐτέθησαν(etethēsan)——「被安放」。路德(Luther)譯作 Stühle gesetzt,Lengerke 也譯作 Stühle aufgestellt——寶座被安放、被設立。因此,這用語的恰當含義似乎不是英譯那樣的「寶座將被傾覆」——彷彿將有世上寶座的傾覆來標誌歷史的這一特定時期——而是在異象中,為要對那獸等施行審判,有寶座被設立、被安放。複數的使用無疑符合別處的用語,為要表明那位大審判者將被其他彷彿一同執行公義者——或為天使,或為蒙救贖的靈——所環繞。

聖經中沒有甚麼比把其他人描繪為如此與神一同向人宣判審判更常見的了。可比較 Matthew 19:28;Luke 22:30;1 Corinthians 6:2-3;1 Timothy 5:21;Revelation 2:26;Revelation 4:4。因此,這裏所標明的時代或時期,將是「那獸」要受神莊嚴審判之時,或是將有某些事件發生、彷彿這樣的審判已經宣判之時。與第四獸相關的事件,將是為聖徒作王、或彌賽亞國度設立作準備的一系列事件中的最後一項,因此經文以這種方式引入,彷彿將有一個莊嚴的審判場景出現。

亙古常在者坐着——為審判的目的而坐。「亙古常在者」(יומין עתיק ‛attı̂yq yômı̂yn)一語指年高或年老的人,意即在年日上最為古老者,相當於法文的 L'Eternel 或英文的 The Eternal(「永恆者」)。它僅見於 Daniel 7:9、7:13、7:22,描繪一位年高德劭者坐下施行審判。這稱謂本身並不表示永恆,但其使用大概與神是永恆的這一事實有關。聖經常用類似的稱謂描繪神,如「從亙古到永遠」的一位(Psalm 90:2)、「首先的」和「末後的」(Isaiah 44:6)等。這裏所指的無疑是神作為審判者、即將宣判審判;不過沒有必要假定它將以可見的、字面的形式出現,正如沒有必要假定這裏以象徵代表的一切都將按字面發生一樣。

若有人堅持,正確的解釋要求將有這裏所描述的那種字面的、可見的審判,那可以回答:同樣嚴格的解釋也會要求將有字面的「殺戮那獸、將他的身體交給火焰」(Daniel 7:11),更普遍地說,會要求這裏以象徵提及的一切都將按字面發生。然而事實是,這一切事件都是以象徵提及的——這些象徵各有豐富的含義,但按其本性與設計,本不應按字面理解。這裏公平隱含的意思只是:關於這第四獸,將有事件發生,彷彿神坐下對它施行莊嚴的審判,並按這裏所說的方式定它的罪。在這預言的應驗中,我們無疑當期待某件具有決定性、極其顯著的事件,足以被視為神在這事上的審判,或顯明神強烈的定罪——如同審判席正式設立、神帶着威嚴顯現宣判一樣。坐是古人宣判審判時慣常的姿勢,正如今人一樣。古時法官坐在寶座或席位上,當事人則站在他面前(可比較 Zechariah 4:13);在希臘人和羅馬人中,法官坐着的姿勢如此必要,以致以其他姿勢宣判的判決一律無效。——Lengerke。有一句格言:Animus sedendo magis sapit——「心思端坐,方顯明達」;Servius(論 Virg. AEn. i. 56)也說:Est enim curantis et solliciti sedere——「謹慎而憂勤的人,本當坐着」。

他的衣服潔白如雪——指他的外袍。這裏所指的,是古代君王、貴族或祭司所穿的長而垂地的外袍。見 Isaiah 6:1 的註釋;並比較 Revelation 1:13 的註釋。白色是純潔與尊榮的象徵,用來代表審判者的純潔和他所要宣判之判決的公正,並非不恰當。正如老皮特(the elder Pitt)在他那篇反對在對美國人的戰爭中僱用印第安人的著名演說中,懇求主教們「以他們細麻衣毫無玷污的純潔介入」一樣。Lengerke 認為——正如 Stuart 教授論 Revelation 1:13 時所說——這裏所說的白色,不是外袍質料本身的顏色,而是一種屬天的光彩或明亮,彷彿閃電或火——與神的威嚴相稱的那種。Lengerke 為此徵引 Exodus 19:18-24;Daniel 2:22;Matthew 17:2;1 Timothy 6:16;以斯德拉二書 7:55;《以賽亞升天記》8:21-25;Revelation 1:13-14;Revelation 4:2-4。但更正確的解釋是:這裏指一件純白的外袍,即審判者可以穿着的那一種,作為他們職分的象徵也並非不恰當。

頭髮如純淨的羊毛——即就其潔白而言,是可敬之年的特徵。可比較 Revelation 1:14 的註釋。這裏呈現在我們眼前的形像,是一位因年歲和智慧而可敬者。

寶座乃火焰——他所坐的座位看似火;即它輝煌燦爛,彷彿一團火焰。

其輪乃烈火——即他寶座的輪子;因為正如在 Ezekiel 1、10 章那樣,耶和華所坐的寶座顯為裝有輪子。在 Ezekiel 1:16 和 10:9,寶座的輪子看似水蒼玉的顏色,即像寶石;這裏它們或許只有火焰的外觀——彷彿這樣的輪子會閃出火焰。米爾頓(Milton)描繪神之子的戰車時也如此說:

「呼嘯之聲中疾馳而出, 父神的戰車, 濃焰迸射,輪中套輪,不牽而自行, 其身自具靈性,更有 四基路伯形像護送;各有四臉, 奇妙無比;他們全身如綴星辰, 翅膀滿佈眼睛;水蒼玉的輪子 也遍是眼睛,輪間烈火奔騰。」

——《失樂園》(Par. Lost),卷六。

英文原文

I beheld - "I continued looking on these strange sights, and contemplating these transformations." This implies that some time elapsed before all these things had occurred. He looked on until he saw a solemn judgment passed on this fourth beast particularly, as if God had come forth in his majesty and glory to pronounce that judgment, and to bring the power and arrogance of the beast to an end.

Till the thrones were cast down - The Chaldee word (כרסון kâresâvân) means, properly, thrones - seats on which monarchs sit. So far as the word is concerned, it would apply either to a throne occupied by an earthly monarch, or to the throne of God. The use of the plural here would seem to imply, at least, that the reference is not to the throne of God, but to some other throne. Maurer and Lengerke suppose that the allusion is to the thrones on which the celestial beings sat in the solemn judgment that was to be pronounced - the throne of God, and the thrones or seats of the attending inhabitants of heaven, coming with him to the solemn judgment. Lengerke refers for illustration to 1 Kings 22:19; Isaiah 6:1; Job 1:6, and Revelation 5:11-12. But the word itself might be properly applied to the thrones of earthly monarchs as well as to the throne of God. The phrase "were cast down" (רמיו remı̂yv), in our translation, would seem to suppose that there was some throwing down, or overturning of thrones, at this period, and that the solemn judgment would follow this, or be consequent on this.

The Chaldee word (רמא remâh) means, as explained by Gesenius, to cast, to throw Daniel 3:21, Daniel 3:24; Daniel 6:16-17; to set, to place, e. g., thrones; to impose tribute Ezra 7:24. The passage is rendered by the Latin Vulgate, throni positi sunt - "thrones were placed;" by the Greek, ἐτέθησαν etethēsan - "were placed." So Luther, stuhle gesetzt; and so Lengerke, stuhle aufgestellt - the thrones were placed, or set up. The proper meaning, therefore, of the phrase would seem to be - not, as in our translation, that the "thrones would be cast down" - as if there was to be an overturning of thrones on the earth to mark this particular period of history - but that there was, in the vision, a setting up, or a placing of thrones for the purpose of administering judgment, etc., on the beast. The use of the plural is, doubtless, in accordance with the language elsewhere employed, to denote the fact that the great Judge would be surrounded with others who would be, as it were, associated in administering justice - either angels or redeemed spirits.

Nothing is more common in the Scripture than to represent others as thus associated with God in pronouncing judgment on men. Compare Matthew 19:28; Luke 22:30; 1 Corinthians 6:2-3; 1 Timothy 5:21; Revelation 2:26; Revelation 4:4. The era, or period, therefore, marked here, would be when a solemn Divine judgment was to be passed on the "beast," or when some events were to take place, as if such a judgment were pronounced. The events pertaining to the fourth beast were to be the last in the series preparatory to the reign of the saints, or the setting up of the kingdom of the Messiah, and therefore it is introduced in this manner, as if a solemn judgment scene were to occur.

And the Ancient of days did sit - Was seated for the purposes of judgment. The phrase "Ancient of days" - יומין עתיק ‛attı̂yq yômı̂yn - is one that denotes an elderly or old person; meaning, he who is most ancient as to days, and is equivalent to the French L'Eternel, or English, The Eternal. It occurs only in Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:13, Daniel 7:22, and is a representation of one venerable in years, sitting down for the purposes of judgment. The appellation does not of itself denote eternity, but it is employed, probably, with reference to the fact that God is eternal. God is often represented under some such appellation, as he that is "from everlasting to everlasting" Psalm 90:2, "the first and the last" Isaiah 44:6, etc. There can be no doubt that the reference here is to God as a Judge, or as about to pronounce judgment, though there is no necessity for supposing that it will be in a visible and literal form, anymore than there is for supposing that all that is here represented by symbols will literally take place.

If it should be insisted on that the proper interpretation demands that there will be a literal and visible judgment, such as is here described, it may be replied that the same rigid interpretation would demand that there will be a literal "slaying of the beast, and a giving of his body to the flame" Daniel 7:11, and more generally still, that all that is here referred to by symbols will literally occur. The fact, however, is, that all these events are referred to by symbols - symbols which have an expressive meaning, but which, by their very nature and design, are not to be literally understood. All that is fairly implied here is, that events would occur in regard to this fourth beast as if God should sit in solemn judgment on it, and should condemn it in the manner here referred to. We are, doubtless, in the fulfillment of this - to look for some event that will be of so decisive and marked a character, that it may be regarded as a Divine judgment in the case, or that will show the strongly marked Divine disapprobation - as really as if the judgment-seat were formally set, and God should appear in majesty to give sentence. Sitting was the usual posture among the ancients, as it is among the moderns, in pronouncing judgment. Among the ancients the judge sat on a throne or bench while the parties stood before him (compare Zechariah 4:13), and with the Greeks and Romans so essential was the sitting posture for a judge, that a sentence pronounced in any other posture was not valid. - Lengerke. It was a maxim, Animus sedendo magis sapit; or, as Servius on the AEn. i. 56, remarks, Est enim curantis et solliciti sedere.

Whose garment was white as snow - Whose robe. The reference here is to the long flowing robe that was worn by ancient princes, noblemen, or priests. See the notes at Isaiah 6:1. Compare the notes at Revelation 1:13. White was an emblem of purity and honor, and was not an improper symbol of the purity of the judge, and of the justness of the sentence which he would pronounce. So the elder Pitt, in his celebrated speech against employing Indians in the war with the American people, besought the bishops to "interpose the unsullied purity of their lawn." Lengerke supposes, as Prof. Stuart does on Revelation 1:13, that the whiteness here referred to was not the mere color of the material of which the robe was made, but, was a celestial splendor or brightness, as if it were lightning or fire - such as is appropriate to the Divine Majesty. Lengerke refers here to Exodus 19:18-24; Daniel 2:22; Matthew 17:2; 1 Timothy 6:16; 2 Esdras 7:55; Ascension of Isaiah 8:21-25; Revelation 1:13-14; Revelation 4:2-4. But the more correct interpretation is to suppose that this refers to a pure white robe, such as judges might wear, and which would not be an improper symbol of their office.

And the hair of his head like the pure wool - That is, for whiteness - a characteristic of venerable age. Compare the notes at Revelation 1:14. The image here set before us is that of one venerable by years and wisdom.

His throne was like the fiery flame - The seat on which he sat seemed to be fire. That is, it was brilliant and splendid, as if it were a mass of flame.

And his wheels as burning fire - The wheels of his throne - for, as in Ezekiel 1; 10, the throne on which Jehovah sat appeared to be on wheels. In Ezekiel EZechariah 1:16; Ezekiel 10:9, the wheels of the throne appeared to be of the color of beryl; that is, they were like precious stones. Here, perhaps, they had only the appearance of a flame - as such wheels would seem to flash flames. So, Milton, in describing the chariot of the Son of God:

"Forth rush'd with whirlwind sound

The chariot of Paternal Deity,

Flashing thick flames, wheel within wheel undrawn,

Itself instinct with spirit, but convoyed

By four cherubic shapes; four faces each

Had wondrous; as with stars their bodies all,

And wings were set with eyes; with eyes the wheels

Of beryl, and careering fires between."

  • Par. Lost, b. vi.

10

Daniel 7:10

開啟正文

從他面前有火,像河發出——彷彿有火的洪流從他的寶座迸發而出。聖經中這類描述比比皆是,用以說明神的威嚴與榮耀。可比較 Revelation 4:5:「有閃電、聲音、雷轟從寶座中發出。」並見 Exodus 19:16;Habakkuk 3:4;Psalm 18:8。

事奉他的有千千——「千之千」,即千乘千倍。首先,有數千在場這事實已震撼人心;繼而這數目又顯得如同那數千再乘以千倍。其觀念是:這是一支龐大得無法數算的軍旅。這裏所指是天使;神降臨我們世界時,常被描述為有大批這類屬天的活物隨行。Deuteronomy 33:2:「他從萬萬聖者中來臨」,所指的是聖潔的眾子。Psalm 68:17:「上帝的車輦累萬盈千。」可比較 Jude 1:14。「事奉」一詞的意思是:他們在旁侍候他。

在他面前侍立的有萬萬——無法數算的軍旅。他們不是受審者,而是他宣判時的侍從。這裏所說的審判不是對全世界,而是對那獸,是為要把國度賜給一位像人子的而作的預備(Daniel 7:13-14)。

他坐著要行審判——意即:一項莊嚴審判行動的一切安排都已就緒,審判的程序也已開始。

案卷都展開了——案卷載有受審者的行為記錄。可比較 Revelation 20:12。大審判官被描繪為把一切待審行為的記錄擺在面前,並要按那些行為宣判。這裏所說的審判,似乎是指神的一次莊嚴作為,把統管世界的權柄從長久支配它的勢力移交給聖徒。如前所述,這段經文的必然解釋並不要求我們把它理解為一次字面可見的審判——「亙古常在者」親自顯現——「一位像人子的」(Daniel 7:13)正式被領到祂面前——或公開可見地把地上一個國度移交給祂。當記住:這一切都是在異象中從先知心中經過;這是一個象徵性的描述;我們要在某個改變帝國進程、終結「獸」與「角」所代表權勢、使那權勢轉入他人之手的事件中尋找它的應驗——這事件要在地上產生一場巨變,恍如這樣一次莊嚴的審判已經執行。這描述的性質要求我們在人類事務的某項重大變革中尋找應驗——奪去「獸」的權力、使統治權轉入他人之手的事件。關於應驗,見 Daniel 7:26 的註釋。

英文原文

A fiery stream issued and came forth from before him - Streams of fire seemed to burst forth from his throne. Representations of this kind abound in the Scriptures to illustrate the majesty and glory of God. Compare Revelation 4:5, "And out of the throne proceeded lightnings, and thunderings, and voices." Exodus 19:16; Habakkuk 3:4; Psalm 18:8.

Thousand thousands ministered unto him - "A thousand of thousands;" that is, thousands multiplied a thousand times. The mind is struck with the fact that there are thousands present - and then the number seems as great as if those thousands were multiplied a thousand times. The idea is that there was an immense - a countless host. The reference here is to the angels, and God is often represented as attended with great numbers of these celestial beings when he comes down to our world. Deuteronomy 33:2, "he came with ten thousands of saints;" that is, of holy ones. Psalm 68:17, "the chariots of God are twenty thousand, even thousands of angels." Compare Jde 1:14. The word "ministered" means that they attended on him.

And ten thousand times ten thousand stood before him - An innumerable host. These were not to be judged, but were attendants on him as he pronounced sentence. The judgment here referred to was not on the world at large, but on the beast, preparatory to giving the kingdom to the one who was like the Son of man Daniel 7:13-14.

The judgment was set - That is, all the arrangements for a solemn act of judgment were made, and the process of the judgment commenced.

And the books were opened - As containing the record of the deeds of those who were to be judged. Compare Revelation 20:12. The great Judge is represented as having before him the record of all the deeds on which judgment was to be pronounced, and to be about to pronounce sentence according to those deeds. The judgment here referred to seems to have been some solemn act on the part of God transferring the power over the world, from what had long swayed it, to the saints. As already remarked, the necessary interpretation of the passage does not require us to understand this of a literal and visible judgment - of a personal appearing of the "Ancient of days" - of a formal application to him by "one like the Son of man" Daniel 7:13 - or of a public and visible making over to him of a kingdom upon the earth. It is to be remembered that all this passed in vision before the mind of the prophet; that it is a symbolic representation; and that we are to find the fulfillment of this in some event changing the course of empire - putting a period to the power represented by the "beast" and the "horn," and causing that power to pass into other hands - producing a change as great on the earth as if such a solemn act of judgment were passed. The nature of the representation requires that we should look for the fulfillment of this in some great and momentous change in human affairs - some events that would take away the power of the "beast," and that would cause the dominion to pass into other hands. On the fulfillment, see the notes at Daniel 7:26.

11

Daniel 7:11

開啟正文

那時我觀看,見那獸因小角說誇大話的聲音——我被這些話吸引——因它們的狂妄、傲慢和驕橫;並且我看見,主要正是因這些緣故,那莊嚴的審判才臨到這獸。先見在此的姿態是:他聽見「角」發出狂妄驕橫的話,就深深留意、懇切期待地等候,要知道將宣告甚麼判決。他曾在 Daniel 7:8 看見那角長起、發展成大權勢、說誇大的話;隨即又看見為審判所作莊嚴宏偉的預備;如今他焦急地等候,要知道將宣告甚麼判決。結果記在本節後半。

那時我觀看——我繼續觀看。這似乎暗示事情不是一時完成的,中間經過了一段時間。

被殺——指第四獸:就是有十角、並在其上長出小角的那獸。這是審判的結果。這裏顯然含着意思:那獸被殺,是因長出的角所說的話;那表號所代表的驕傲狂妄,正是那獸被置於死地的原因。經文沒有說那獸將被誰所殺;但合理的意思是:那死亡的原因將是神的審判,因着在眾角中間長出來的那「角」之驕傲狂妄。若「獸」代表地上將存在的一個強大君主國,「小角」代表從其中興起的一個新權勢,那麼應驗就當在這樣的事實中尋找:這個昔日如此強大可畏、踐踏列國的權勢,將因它所主張之權威的性質,在神的審判之下終於滅亡。我們要在這樣的局勢中尋找這事的成就:一個新權勢從既存的統治權中興起;既存的統治權依然存在,卻大受新權勢的控制,以致因它所生出者的驕傲狂妄,必須毀滅前者。換言之,第四獸所代表之王國的毀滅,將是因小角所代表者的狂妄而臨到的神聖審判。

身體損壞——意即這裏所代表的王國必遭毀滅,正如獸的身體若被毀便徹底滅亡一樣。那王國本身的權勢必告終結。

扔在火中焚燒——被焚毀。這以強烈的措辭表明:這裏以獸為表號的權勢將被徹底毀滅。然而,沒有必要推想這就是成就的方式,或認為必藉火而成。當記得這一切都是表號;表號的任何一部分都不該比另一部分更按字面理解。以為會有字面焚燒的火,與以為會有字面的獸、十角或小角,同樣不合宜。合理的意思是:那毀滅將如藉火成就的一般真實;或說是火所恰當象徵的那種毀滅。這裏的暗指,大概是由於獸的屍體常被火焚燒這一事實。

英文原文

I beheld then, because of the voice of the great words which the horn spake - I was attracted by these words - by their arrogance, and haughtiness, and pride; and I saw that it was on account of these mainly that the solemn judgment proceeded against the beast. The attitude of the seer here is this - he heard arrogant and proud words uttered by the "horn," and he waited in deep attention, and in earnest expectation, to learn what judgment would be pronounced. He had seen Daniel 7:8 that horn spring up and grow to great power, and utter great things; he had then seen, immediately on this, a solemn and sublime preparation for judgment, and he now waited anxiously to learn what sentence would be pronounced. The result is stated in the subsequent part of the verse.

I beheld - I continued beholding. This would seem to imply that it was not done at once, but that some time intervened.

Even until the beast was slain - The fourth beast: what had the ten horns, and on which the little horn had sprung up. This was the result of the judgment. It is evidently implied here that the beast was slain on account of the words uttered by the horn that sprang up, or that the pride and arrogance denoted by that symbol were the cause of the fact that the beast was put to death. It is not said by whom the beast would be slain; but the fair meaning is, that the procuring cause of that death would be the Divine judgment, on account of the pride and arrogancy of the "horn" that sprang up in the midst of the others. If the "beast" represents a mighty monarchy that would exist on the earth and the "little horn" a new power that would spring out of that, then the fulfillment is to be found in such a fact as this - that this power, so mighty and terrible formerly, and that crushed down the nations, would, under the Divine judgment, be ultimately destroyed, on account of the nature of the authority claimed. We are to look for the accomplishment of this in some such state of things as that of a new power springing out of an existing dominion, that the existing dominion still remains, but was so much controlled by the new power, that it would be necessary to destroy the former on account of the arrogance and pride of what sprang from it. In other words, the destruction of the kingdom represented by the fourth beast would be, as a Divine judgment, on account of the arrogancy of that represented by the little horn.

And his body destroyed - That is, there would be a destruction of the kingdom here represented as much as there would be of the beast if his body was destroyed. The power of that kingdom, as such, is to come to an end.

And given to the burning flame - Consumed. This would represent, in strong terms, that the power here symbolized by the beast would be utterly destroyed. It is not, however, necessary to suppose that this is to be the mode in which it would be done, or that it would be by fire. It is to be remembered that all this is symbol, and no one part of the symbol should be taken literally more than another, nor is it congruous to suppose there would be a literal consuming fire in the case anymore than that there would be literally a beast, or ten horns, or a little horn, The fair meaning is, that there would be as real a destruction as if it were accomplished by fire; or a destruction of which fire would be the proper emblem. The allusion is here, probably, to the fact that the dead bodies of animals were often consumed by fire.

12

Daniel 7:12

開啟正文

至於其餘的獸——牠們已被取代,卻未被滅絕。看來在異象中,但以理仍見牠們存留着,只是權柄已被奪去,兇猛已被制服;又或者說,牠們似乎仍存活一段時間,即在異象進行期間仍然存在。牠們並不像第四獸那樣被砍倒、毀滅、燒盡。

牠們的權柄被奪去——牠們已被取代,不再操掌權柄,不再顯出轄制列國的作為。牠們仍然存在,卻已被制伏、歸於平靜。人仍可辨認牠們,只是牠們再不能像昔日強盛輝煌之時那樣扮演顯赫的角色。牠們的權勢已經消逝。這段的解釋並不困難。我們自然應當從以下的事實尋求應驗:這前三獸所指的列國仍然存續,在疆界、風俗或語言上仍可辨認為國家;只是這些國家昔日所掌握的權柄,已經轉入他人之手。

然而牠們的生命卻仍存留——邊註依迦勒底文作「給牠們延長了壽命」。意思是說,牠們並不像第四獸的權勢那樣,在莊嚴的審判之後被徹底毀滅、燒盡。其含義是:這些國度在一段時期內仍將存有生氣。牠們仍有一線生機;牠們與第四獸所代表的國度之分別,正如被制伏卻仍存活的野獸,與被殺戮焚燒的野獸之間的分別。我們應當在這樣的局勢中尋求應驗:三獸所指的諸國雖被制伏、被別國接續,卻仍保留若干國族特性;而另一國度則沒有世俗意義上的繼承者,其權勢完全止息,統治權全然歸於他人之手——以致可以說,那國作為一個國度,已全然不復存在。

直到所定的時候和日期——可比較 Daniel 7:25 的註釋。這裏所提及的時間並非明確可知。所用的短語(ועדן עד־זמן ‛ad-zeman ve‛ı̂ddân)指一段確定的時期;原文中這兩個詞都是指被指定或設立的時間,但無論哪一個都沒有表明這時間的長短,正如我們所說的「時間」一詞也無從表明一樣。Luther 譯作:「因為已定了時候和時辰給牠們,指定每一個應當存留多久。」Grotius 將此解釋為:「牠們不能延續到神所定的期限之外。」這句迦勒底文的真實含義大概是:「一段時期,即一段確定的時期。」先知的心思起初專注於牠們仍繼續存活這一事實;繼而專注於——以某種顯而易見的方式——這存活乃是為着一段確定的時期。也許在異象中,他看見牠們相繼死去或消失。然而,在這裏所用的詞語中,沒有任何東西能使我們斷定牠們將延續多久。小角所代表的權勢將延續多久,已在 Daniel 7:25 中有所解釋;至於前三獸所代表的權勢其存在將延續多久,卻沒有任何線索可供查究。所能明白的只是:牠們將被延長存活某一段時期,而這段時期乃是確定而固定的。

英文原文

As concerning the rest of the beasts - They had been superseded, but not destroyed. It would seem that they were still represented in vision to Daniel, as retaining their existence, though their power was taken away, and their fierceness subdued, or that they still seemed to remain alive for a time, or while the vision was passing. They were not cut down, destroyed, and consumed as the fourth beast was.

They had their dominion taken away - They were superseded, or they no longer exercised power. They no more appeared exerting a control over the nations. They still existed, but they were subdued and quiet. It was possible to discern them, but they no longer acted the conspicuous part which they had done in the days of their greatness and grandeur. Their power had passed away. This cannot be difficult of interpretation. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in the fact that the nations referred to by these first three beasts were still in being, and could be recognized as nations, in their boundaries, or customs, or languages; but that the power which they had wielded had passed into other hands.

Yet their lives were prolonged - Margin, as in Chaldee, "a prolonging in life was given them." That is, they were not utterly destroyed and consumed as the power of the fourth beast was after the solemn judgment. The meaning is, that in these kingdoms there would be energy for a time. They had life still; and the difference between them and the kingdom represented by the fourth beast was what would exist between wild animals subdued but still living, and a wild animal killed and burned. We should look for the fulfillment of this in some state of things where the kingdoms referred to by the three beasts were subdued and succeeded by others, though they still retained something of their national character; while the other kingdom had no successor of a civil kind, but where its power wholly ceased, and the dominion went wholly into other hands - so that it might be said that that kingdom, as such, had wholly ceased to be.

For a season and time - Compare the notes at Daniel 7:25. The time mentioned here is not definite. The phrase used (ועדן עד־זמן ‛ad-zeman ve‛ı̂ddân) refers to a definite period, both the words in the original referring to a designated or appointed time, though neither of them indicates anything about the length of the time, anymore than our word time does. Luther renders this, "For there was a time and an hour appointed to them how long each one should continue." Grotius explains this as meaning, "Beyond the time fixed by God they could not continue." The true meaning of the Chaldee is probably this: "For a time, even a definite time." The mind of the prophet is at first fixed upon the fact that they continue to live; then upon the fact, somehow apparent, that it is for a definite period. Perhaps in the vision he saw them one after another die or disappear. In the words used here, however, there is nothing by which we can determine how long they were to continue. The time that the power represented by the little horn is to continue explained in Daniel 7:25, but there is no clue by which we can ascertain how long the existence of the power represented by the first three beasts was to continue. All that is clear is, that it was to be lengthened out for some period, but that that was a definite and fixed period.

13

Daniel 7:13

開啟正文

我在夜間的異象中觀看——顯然是在同一夜的異象中,或說在同一場合,因為這些異象是相連的。見 Daniel 7:1、Daniel 7:7。其含義是:他繼續觀看,或說有一個新的異象在他面前經過。

見有一位像人子的……——值得注意的是,但以理並不嘗試以任何象徵來表示這一位。以象徵表示的方式到第四獸為止;如今描述轉為字面的形式——彌賽亞與聖徒之國的設立。為何有這形式的轉變,經文並未說明,也無從知曉;但聖經作者似乎謹慎地避免以任何象徵來代表彌賽亞。「人子」一語——אנשׁ בר bar 'ĕnâsh——在舊約中沒有別處以這樣的關聯、這樣的所指出現;但在新約中卻屢見不鮮,事實上這是救主最喜用來稱呼自己的名稱。在 Daniel 3:25,我們見到「神的兒子」一語(見該處註釋),用於那與三個被扔進烈火窯中的「少年人」同在的一位;在以西結書中,「人子」一語屢次用於先知自己,在他的預言中出現八十多次;但這裏所用的表達,在舊約中沒有別處用於此處所指的那位。這語既在此出現,就必須加以解釋——不僅因它與預言中相連的事件有關,也因它對新約語言的形成影響甚鉅。關於它的含義,有三個問題:它表示甚麼?它指誰?它的正當應驗是甚麼?

(一)這一語並不僅是希伯來文或迦勒底文中指「人」的用詞,而總是帶着某種特殊意義,與所指之人的某種特殊特性有關,或與某種特殊用意相連。要查明這用意,須顧及原文的表達。「אישׁ 'ı̂ysh 與 אישׁה 'ı̂iyshâh 二詞僅用作性別的標記;אנושׁ 'ĕnôsh 在語源上與 אישׁ 'ı̂ysh 相近,使用時總是顧及其本義——軟弱、患病;它是『人』的倫理稱謂;而 אדם 'âdâm 則指人處於肉體、天然的狀態——這說明了 Psalm 8:4;Job 25:6 等經文對這詞的使用,也圓滿解釋了它與 בן bên 連用的緣故。因此,強調的稱呼 אדם בן bên 'âdâm——人子——(在以西結書中)是不斷提醒先知:他與其餘眾人一樣,只是一個人。」——Havernick, Com. on Ezekiel 2:1-2,轉引自 Bibliotheca Sacra, v. 718。這裏所用的表達是 בר־אנושׁ bar-'ĕnôsh,恰當地指人處於軟弱無力、易於患病等的狀態。若把這語用於某人作「人子」,便是表示他有分於人類的軟弱與脆弱;而「人子」一語既由救主用於自己,就無疑是指涉這一事實——祂與我們人類有獨特的關係;祂在各樣都是人;祂是我們中的一個;祂如此取了我們的本性,以致一個能立刻表明這點的名稱加於祂,就有特殊的貼切性。但以理在這裏所用的語,將表示某位:

(a) 具有人的形像的;

(b) 與人有獨特關係的——彷彿人性具體彰顯在祂裏面。

(二)接着的問題是:這是指誰?先知在異象中所見的究竟是誰?或說,這是要表明誰?這問題與其說是「但以理以為或明白這是誰」,不如說是「事實上要表明的是誰?應驗將在誰身上找到?」因為,若假定這是屬天的異象,那麼顯然它是要指明某一位,完全的應驗要在祂身上找到。如今,只要承認這是屬天的異象,並承認它是要代表將來要發生的事,就有最充分的理由認為所指的乃是彌賽亞;這實在明顯不過,可以視為確定無疑的事實之一,並由此判斷這預言的性質與用意。理由如下:

(a) 這名稱本身,正是主耶穌親自採用的名——是祂在世時喜用以稱呼自己的名。祂以專門的意義使用這名;祂使用它,是叫人明白這是指彌賽亞;祂使用它,彷彿它與彌賽亞的關聯無需任何解釋。但這用法只能源於但以理書的這段經文,因為在舊約中再沒有別處,這名稱能恰當地指彌賽亞,或被人理解為適用於祂。

(b) 歷世歷代的猶太作者大體上都如此解釋。我引述這點,不是說他們的解釋具有權威,而是要表明這是自然而明顯的含義;也因為——如下文所見——正是這解釋塑造了新約的語言,並在新約中得了完全的認可。古老的《光輝之書》(Zohar)中說:「在彌賽亞的時代,以色列必歸耶和華成為一民,祂必使他們在地上成為一國,他們必管轄上下;正如所記:『看哪,有一位像人子的,駕着天雲而來』;這就是王彌賽亞,論到祂有話說:『當那列王在位的時候,天上的神必另立一國,永不敗壞……』」《塔木德》(Talmud)也是如此,古代猶太拉比的大多數也是如此。見 Gill, Com. in loc.。誠然,這解釋在猶太拉比中並非一致,但在他們中間始終佔優勢,正如在基督教解經家中一樣。

(c) 主耶穌採用「人子」這稱號作為祂自稱之名,這似乎是對這解釋的認可。這稱號必然不斷使人想起但以理書的這段經文是指着祂說的;尤其因為祂把「人子將駕着天雲降臨」等宣告與這稱號相連。祂在這樣的關聯中使用這稱號,幾乎不可能不叫人想起但以理書的這段經文,也不可能不在聽者心中留下印象,以為祂有意叫他們把這經文應用到自己身上。

(d) 還可以補充:這語不能恰當地適用於任何別位。Porphyry 固然以為所指的是猶大·馬加比(Judas Maccabeus);Grotius 認為它指羅馬人;Aben Ezra 認為指以色列人;Cocceius 認為指至高者的聖民(Gill);但這些都是不自然的解釋,與讓新約語言影響心思所得的領會相反。這稱號——救主自己屢次使用;駕天雲而來的伴隨情景;這異象所佔的位置——恰在聖徒之國設立之前;以及那國只能在彌賽亞之下設立的事實——都指向祂就是異象中所代表的那位。

(三)但若這是指彌賽亞,下一個問題便是:這異象的正當應驗當視為甚麼?它確切關乎甚麼?我們是否要設想人子——彌賽亞——將真實地駕着天雲顯現,並以公開而莊嚴的方式把國度交在聖徒手中?回答這些問題時,可以留意以下幾點:

(a) 這不可能理解為與最後審判有關,因為這裏根本不是在講審判。「人子」在此不是被描述為在人類事務終局時前來審判世界,而是為要設立一個國度,或為祂的聖徒取得一個國度。這裏沒有世人被聚集;沒有審判義人和惡人的行動;沒有對二者的宣判。顯然,世界在聖徒的統治下還要延續很久。

(b) 這不當按字面理解;就是說,我們不當從這段經文期望人子為設立聖徒之國而字面上駕着天雲顯現。因為若有一部分當按字面理解,就沒有理由不全部按字面理解。那麼我們要期望的,就不僅是人子駕雲顯現,還有以下的事作為異象應驗的一部分:字面上安放一個寶座或座位;寶座字面上發出火焰;「亙古常在者」字面上顯現,衣着白衣,頭髮如羊毛;人子字面上趨前到坐在寶座上的祂那裏,向祂求一個國度等。但沒有人能相信這一切都將發生;也沒有人確實相信。

(c) 正當的解釋,是把但以理所見的視為一個異象——對世上將有一種局面的描繪,彷彿這裏所描述的將要發生。就是說,將有大事發生,而這是恰當的象徵性描繪——或彷彿人子、彌賽亞將這樣顯現;將趨近「亙古常在者」;將接受一個國度,並把它交給聖徒。如今,這裏所要教導的、我們所當期望的,並不難明白;這些事實要點如下:

  1. 這裏稱為「亙古常在者」的,是權柄與統治之源。

  2. 這裏以獸和角所代表的權勢,將受到某種嚴厲的裁決。

  3. 世界的國度與統治權,事實上將賜給這裏稱為「人子」的那位——彌賽亞——這事實在此以祂趨近那作為萬權之源的「亙古常在者」來表徵。

  4. 國度或權柄將以某種方式轉入聖徒手中;或說在地上將設立一個國度,以祂為元首,在其中對世界的統治權實際掌握在祂子民手中,彌賽亞的律法通行無阻。那國度的主要特性如何,可由 Daniel 7:14 的解釋、連同 Daniel 7:27 得知。

駕着天雲而來——即祂彷彿自天空、被雲彩環繞而降。救主論到自己將來審判世界時,說祂將駕雲、被雲彩環繞而來,大概正是要指涉這裏的話(Matthew 24:30;Matthew 26:64;Mark 13:26;Mark 14:62;可比較 Revelation 1:7)。雲彩是神性恰當的象徵。見 Psalm 97:2;Psalm 104:3。異教徒也採用同樣的象徵,描繪他們的神明在雲彩遮蓋中顯現:

「Tandem venias, precamur, Nube candentes humeros amictus, Augur Apollo!」 ——Horace, Lyr. I.2.

眼前這經文的所指,不是最後的審判,而是地上的國度將轉入彌賽亞手中這事實。祂被描繪為威嚴地臨到世界,並接受一個將接續眾獸所代表之國的國度。

來到亙古常在者面前——見 Daniel 7:9。這表明本段不可能指最後的審判。祂來到「亙古常在者」——神這權柄之源——面前,彷彿要為一個國度祈求;而不是要向世人宣判。這裏的舉動恰當地表明:神是萬權之源;一切掌權者的權柄都出於祂;甚至彌賽亞在地上設立祂的國度時,也是從父手中領受的。這與新約中一切的描述一致。我們不當設想這將按字面發生。不會有那以年老之貌代表的一位——「亙古常在者」——字面上坐在寶座上;也不會有一位以人的形像字面上趨前接受國度。這類經文正顯明按字面解釋聖經語言之嘗試的荒謬。這象徵所恰當表達的只是:彌賽亞將在地上設立的國度,是從神領受的。

他們把祂領到亙古常在者面前——就是說,祂被領到亙古常在者面前。這也可以解作:祂的侍從把祂領近。這語必然含有的意思只是:祂趨近亙古常在者的座位,並從祂領受一個國度。

英文原文

I saw in the night visions - Evidently in the same night visions, or on the same occasion, for the visions are connected. See Daniel 7:1, Daniel 7:7. The meaning is, that he continued beholding, or that a new vision passed before him.

And, behold, one like the Son of man ... - It is remarkable that Daniel does not attempt to represent this by any symbol. The representation by symbols ceases with the fourth beast; and now the description assumes a literal form - the setting up of the kingdom of the Messiah and of the saints. Why this change of form occurs is not stated or known, but the sacred writers seem carefully to have avoided any representation of the Messiah by symbols. The phrase "The Son of Man" - אנשׁ בר bar 'ĕnâsh - does not occur elsewhere in the Old Testament in such a connection, and with such a reference as it has here, though it is often found in the New, and is, in fact, the favorite term by which the Saviour designates himself. In Daniel 3:25, we have the phrase "the Son of God" (see the note at that passage), as applicable to one who appeared with the three" children" that were cast into the burning furnace; and in Ezekiel, the phrase "son of man" often occurs as applicable to himself as a prophet, being found more than eighty times in his prophecies, but the expression here used does not elsewhere occur in the Old Testament as applicable to the personage intended. As occurring here, it is important to explain it, not only in view of the events connected with it in the prophecy, but as having done much to mould the language of the New Testament. There are three questions in regard to its meaning: What does it signify? To whom does it refer? And what would be its proper fulfillment?

(1) The phrase is more than a mere Hebrew or Chaldee expression to denote man, but is always used with some peculiar significancy, and with relation to some peculiar characteristic of the person to whom it is applied, or with some special design. To ascertain this design, regard should be had to the expression of the original. "While the words אישׁ 'ı̂ysh and אישׁה 'ı̂iyshâh are used simply as designations of sex, אנושׁ 'ĕnôsh, which is etymologically akin to אישׁ 'ı̂ysh, is employed with constant reference to its original meaning, to be weak, sick; it is the ethical designation of man, but אדם 'âdâm denotes man as to his, physical, natural condition - whence the use of the word in such passages as Psalm 8:4; Job 25:6, and also its connection with בן bên are satisfactorily explained, The emphatic address אדם בן bên 'âdâm - Son of man - is therefore (in Ezekiel) a continued admonition to the prophet to remember that he is a man like all the rest." - Havernick, Com. on, Ezekiel 2:1-2, quoted in the Bibliotheca Sacra, v. 718. The expression used here is בר־אנושׁ bar -'ĕnôsh, and would properly refer to man as weak and feeble, and as liable to be sick, etc. Applied to anyone as "a Son of man," it would be used to denote that he partook of the weakness and infirmities of the race; and, as the phrase "the Son of man" is used in the New Testament when applied by the Saviour to himself, there is an undoubted reference to this fact - that he sustained a peculiar relation to our race; that he was in all respects a man; that he was one of us; that he had so taken our nature on himself that there was a peculiar propriety that a term which would at once designate this should be given to him. The phrase used here by Daniel would denote some one

(a) in the human form;

(b) some one sustaining a peculiar relation to man - as if human nature were embodied in him.

(2) The next inquiry here is, to whom, this refers? Who, in fact, was the one that was thus seen in vision by the prophet? Or who was designed to be set forth by this? This inquiry is not so much, whom did Daniel suppose or understand this to be? as, who was in fact designed to be represented; or in whom would the fulfillment be found? For, on the supposition that this was a heavenly vision, it is clear that it was intended to designate some one in whom the complete fulfillment was to be found. Now, admitting that this was a heavenly vision, and that it was intended to represent what would occur in future times, there are the clearest reasons for supposing that the Messiah was referred to; and indeed this is so plain, that it may be assumed as one of the indisputable things by which to determine the character and design of the prophecy. Among these reasons are the following:

(a) The name itself, as a name assumed by the Lord Jesus - the favorite name by which he chose to designate himself when on the earth. This name he used technically; he used it as one that would be understood to denote the Messiah; he used it as if it needed no explanation as having a reference to the Messiah. But this usage could have been derived only from this passage in Daniel, for there is no other place in the Old Testament where the name could refer with propriety to the Messiah, or would be understood to be applicable to him.

(b) This interpretation has been given to it by the Jewish writers in general, in all ages. I refer to this, not to say that their explanation is authoritative, but to show that it is the natural and obvious meaning; and because, as we shall see, it is what has given shape and form to the language of the New Testament, and is fully sanctioned there. Thus, in the ancient book of Zohar it is said, "In the times of the Messiah, Israel shall be one people to the Lord, and he shall make them one nation in the earth, and they shall rule above and below; as it is written, "Behold, one like the Son of man came with the clouds of heaven;" this is the King Messiah, of whom it is written, And in the days of these kings shall the God of heaven set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed, etc." So in the Talmud, and so the majority of the ancient Jewish rabbis. See Gill, Com. in loc. It is true that this interpretation has not been uniform among the Jewish rabbis, but still it has prevailed among them, as it has among Christian interpreters.

(c) A sanction seems to be given to this interpretation by the adoption of the title "Son of man" by the Lord Jesus, as that by which he chose to designate himself. That title was such as would constantly suggest this place in Daniel as referring to himself, and especially as he connected with it the declaration that "the Son of man would come in the clouds of heaven, etc." It was hardly possible that he should use the title in such a connection without suggesting this place in Daniel, or without leaving the impression on the minds of his hearers that he meant to be understood as applying this to himself.

(d) It may be added, that it cannot with propriety be applied to any other. Porphyry, indeed, supposed that Judas Maccabeus was intended; Grotius that it referred to the Roman people; Aben Ezra to the people of Israel; and Cocceius to the people of the Most High (Gill); but all these are unnatural interpretations, and are contrary to what one would obtain by allowing the language of the New Testament to influence his mind. The title - so often used by the Saviour himself; the attending circumstances of the clouds of heaven; the place which the vision occupies - so immediately preceding the setting up of the kingdom of the saints; and the fact that that kingdom can be set up only under the Messiah, all point to him as the personage represented in the vision.

(3) But if it refers to the Messiah, the next inquiry is, What is to be regarded as the proper fulfillment of the vision? To what precisely does it relate? Are we to suppose that there will be a literal appearing of the Son of man - the Messiah - in the clouds of heaven, and a passing over of the kingdom in a public and solemn manner into the hands of the saints? In reply to these questions, it may be remarked

(a) that this cannot be understood as relating to the last judgment, for it is not introduced with reference to at all. The "Son of man" is not here represented as coming with a view to judge the world at the winding-up of human affairs, but for the purpose of setting up a kingdom, or procuring a kingdom for his saints. There is no assembling of the people of the world together; no act of judging the righteous and the wicked; no pronouncing of a sentence on either. It is evident that the world is to continue much longer under the dominion of the saints.

(b) It is not to be taken literally; that is, we are not, from this passage, to expect a literal appearance of the of man in the clouds of heaven, preparatory to the setting up of the kingdom of the saints. For if one portion is to be taken literally, there is no reason why all should not be. Then we are to expect, not merely the appearing of the Son of man in the clouds, but also the following things, as a part of the fulfillment of the vision, to wit: the literal placing of a throne, or seat; the literal streaming forth of flame from his throne; the literal appearing of the "Ancient of days," with a garment of white, and hair as wool; a literal approach of the Son of man to him as seated on his throne to ask of him a kingdom, etc. But no one can believe that all this is to occur; no one does believe that it will.

(c) The proper interpretation is to regard this, as it was seen by Daniel, as a vision - a representation of a state of things in the world as if what is here described would occur. That is, great events were to take place, of which this would be a proper symbolic representation - or as if the Son of man, the Messiah, would thus appear; would approach the "Ancient of days;" would receive a kingdom, and would make it over to the saints. Now, there is no real difficulty in understanding what is here meant to be taught, and what we are to expect; and these points of fact are the following, namely,:

  1. That he who is here called the "Ancient of days" is the source of power and dominion.

  2. That there would be some severe adjudication of the power here represented by the beast and the horn.

  3. That the kingdom or dominion of the world is to be in fact given to him who is here called "the Son of man" - the Messiah - a fact represented here by his approaching the "Ancient of days," who is the source of all power.

  4. That there is to be some passing over of the kingdom or power into the hands of the saints; or some setting up of a kingdom on the earth, of which he is to be the head, and in which the dominion over the world shall be in fact in the hands of his people, and the laws of the Messiah everywhere prevail. What will be the essential characteristics of that kingdom we may learn by the exposition of Daniel 7:14, compared with Daniel 7:27.

Came with the clouds of heaven - That is, he seemed to come down from the sky encompassed with clouds. So the Saviour, probably intending to refer to this language, speaks of himself, when he shall come to judge the world, as coming in clouds, or encompassed by clouds, Matthew 24:30; Matthew 26:64; Mark 13:26; Mark 14:62. Compare Revelation 1:7. Clouds are an appropriate symbol of the Divinity. See Psalm 97:2; Psalm 104:3. The same symbol was employed by the pagan, representing their deities as appearing covered with a cloud:

"Tandem venias, precamur,

Nube candentes humeros amictus,

Augur Apollo!"

  • Horace, Lyr. I.2.

The allusion in the place before us is not to the last judgment, but to the fact that a kingdom on tho earth would be passed over into the hands of the Messiah. He is represented as coming sublimely to the world, and as receiving a kingdom that would succeed those represented by the beasts.

And came to the Ancient of days - Daniel 7:9. This shows that the passage cannot refer to the final judgment. He comes to the "Ancient of days" - to God as the source of power - as if to ask a petition for a kingdom; not to pronounce a judgment on mankind. The act here appropriately denotes that God is the source of all power; that all who reign derive their authority from him, and that even the Messiah, in setting up his kingdom in the world, receives it at the hand of the Father. This is in accordance with all the representations in the New Testament. We are not to suppose that this will occur literally. There is to be no such literal sitting of one with the appearance of age - denoted by the "Ancient of days" - on a throne; nor is there to be any such literal approaching him by one in the form of a man to receive a kingdom. Such passages show the absurdity of the attcmpts to interpret the language of the Scriptures literally. All that this symbol fairly means must be, that the kingdom that was to be set up under the Messiah on the earth was received from God.

And they brought him near before him - That is, he was brought near before him. Or, it may mean that his attendants brought him near. All that the language necessarily implies is, that he came near to his seat, and received from him a kingdom.

14

Daniel 7:14

開啟正文

得了權柄——即:由那位被描述為「亙古常在者」的一位所賜。這裏合理的解釋是:他從那位領受了權柄。這是新約一貫的表述。參 Matthew 28:18;John 3:35;1 Corinthians 15:27。「權柄」一詞在此指統治或權威——即君王所行使的。他被立為一國的君王或統治者。

榮耀——即與這樣一個國度元首相稱的榮耀或尊榮。

國度——即:他將作王。他將擁有主權。這國度的性質與範圍,隨即被指明為普世而永恆。至於這語言是否按字面、以可見的方式應驗的問題,將在本節末合宜地討論。此處只需注意:舊約各處都應許彌賽亞將為君王、將有國度。參 Psalm 2:1-12;Isaiah 9:6-7。

使各方各國各族的人都事奉他——這國度將是普世的;將涵蓋萬國。此處的語言正是有力表明普世性的說法。見 Daniel 3:4;Daniel 4:1 的註釋。這暗示那國度將擴展到地上萬國之上,而我們只能指望在彌賽亞這樣的普世王權中,尋見這應許的應驗。

他的權柄是永遠的……——那由四獸所代表的其他國度都將過去,惟獨這國度長存直到永遠。沒有任何事物能毀滅它。它不會像地上大多數王國那樣,有任何足以招致毀滅的內在弱點或紛爭之源,也不會有任何外來勢力侵犯或傾覆它。這宣告並未斷言這國度將以何種形式存在,只是斷言它必長存的事實。關於此處無疑所指的彌賽亞國度,新約一再而一致地宣告同樣的事。參 Matthew 16:18;Hebrews 12:28;Revelation 11:15。這事將以怎樣的形式和方式成就,新約中有更充分的開展;在但以理所見的異象中,只陳明了事實。

如今的問題是:關於將要賜給聖徒的國度,什麼才算是這預言的應驗?按照異象中所用的語言,我們有什麼正當的根據,可以期望地上將發生什麼?關於這些問題,只能取兩種觀點之一,而本段經文的解釋必支持其一。

(甲)其一設想這將按字面應驗,即神的兒子、彌賽亞,將親自在地上作王。按此觀點,他將要來建立一個可見而榮耀的國度,以耶路撒冷為首都,統管全世界。萬民萬族都必順服他;一切權柄都必由他的子民在他之下執掌。

(乙)按另一觀點,神的兒子將在地上作屬靈的統治;即:他宗教的原則將到處盛行,義人將掌權,救贖主的律法將處處蒙遵行。他的福音將如此普及於眾人——君王與百姓——的心中;福音將如此改良一切法律、規範一切風俗、除去一切弊端及罪惡的種種形式;人們將普遍如此處於那福音的影響之下,以致可以說,他在地上作王,或者說,實際施政的政府就是他的政府。

關於這些不同的觀點,以及本段的正確解釋,可以這樣說:

(1)我們不應尋求此事按字面的應驗;我們不應期望這裏所描述的將按字面發生。這整體顯然是象徵性的描述,其應驗須在這象徵所恰當表明的事中尋找。沒有人能強說,將有一位形狀如老人——「亙古常在者」——實際坐在寶座上,或將有一位「像人子的」實際來到他那裏領受國度。但這描述的一部分若不可按字面解釋,另一部分為何要按字面解釋呢?還可補充說,經上並沒有一處說這將按字面發生。

(2)這裏所合理暗示的一切,都在後一種解釋中尋得。福音原則這樣的普及,足以承受這語言的分量,而異象的每一部分都可在其中尋得實際的應驗。

(甲)這國度出於神的事實——由「亙古常在者」所代表。

(乙)這國度由他所賜的事實,即國度由他移交給彌賽亞。

(丙)彌賽亞將有這樣國度的事實;即他將在地上、在人的心中與生命中作王。

(丁)這國度將是普世的事實——擴及萬民。

(戊)以及這國度將是永恆的事實;即它將延續到時間的末了,或此地一切事物的終局,並且那時在天上永存無疆。

關於本段非常完整而充分的解說——其完整與充分,足以免去此處任何附加的說明——見 Daniel 2:44-45 的註釋。

英文原文

And there was given him dominion - That is, by him who is represented as the "Ancient of days." The fair interpretation of this is, that he received the dominion from him. This is the uniform representation in the New Testament. Compare Matthew 28:18; John 3:35; 1 Corinthians 15:27. The word dominion here means rule or auhority - such as a prince exercises. He was set over a kingdom as a prince or ruler.

And glory - That is the glory or honor appropriate to one at the head of such an empire.

And a kingdom - That is, he would reign. He would have sovereignty. The nature and the extent of this kingdom is immediately designated as one that would be universal and perpetual. What is properly implied in this language as to the question whether it will be literal and visible, will be appropriately considered at the close of the verse. All that is necessary to be noticed here is, that it is everywhere promised in the Old Testament that the Messiah would be a king, and have a kingdom. Compare Psalm 2:1-12; Isaiah 9:6-7.

That all people, nations, and languages should serve him - It would be universal; would embrace all nations. The language here is such as would emphatically denote universality. See the notes at Daniel 3:4; Daniel 4:1. It implies that that kingdom would extend over all the nations of the earth, and we are to look for the fulfillment of this only in such a universal reign of the Messiah.

His dominion is an everlasting dominion ... - The others, represented by the four beasts, would all pass away, but this would be permanent and eternal. Nothing would destroy it. It would not have, as most kingdoms of the earth have had, any such internal weakness or source of discord as would be the cause of its destruction, nor would there be any external power that would invade or overthrow it. This declaration affirms nothing as to the form in which the kingdom would exist, but merely asserts the fact that it would do so. Respecting the kingdom of the Messiah, to which this undoubtedly alludes, the same thing is repeatedly and uniformly affirmed in the New Testament. Compare Matthew 16:18; Hebrews 12:28; Revelation 11:15. The form and manner in which this will occur is more fully developed in the New Testament; in the vision seen by Daniel the fact only is stated.

The question now arises, What would be a fulfillment of this prediction respecting the kingdom that will be given to the saints? What, from the language used in the vision, should we be legitimately authorized to expect to take place on the earth? In regard to these questions, there are but two views which can be taken, and the interpretation of the passage must sustain the one or the other.

(a) One is what supposes that this will be literally fulfilled in the sense that the Son of God, the Messiah, will reign personally on earth. According to this, he will come to set up a visible and glorious kingdom, making Jerusalem his capital, and swaying his scepter over the world. All nations and people will be subject to him; all authority will be wielded by his people under him.

(b) According to the other view, there will be a spiritual reign of the Son of God over the earth; that is, the principles of his religion will everywhere prevail, and the righteous will rule, and the laws of the Redeemer will be obeyed everywhere. There will be such a prevalence of his gospel on the hearts of all - rulers and people; the gospel will so modify all laws, and control all customs, and remove all abuses, and all the forms of evil; men will be so generally under the influence of that gospel, that it may be said that He reigns on the earth, or that the government actually administered is his.

In regard to these different views, and to the true interpretation of the passage, it may be remarked,

(1) That we are not to look for the literal fulfillment of this; we are not to expect that what is here described will literally occur. The whole is evidently a symbolic representation, and the fulfillment is to be found in something that the symbol would properly denote. No one can pretend that there is to be an actual sitting on the throne, by one in the form of an old man - "the Ancient of days" - or that there is to be a literal coming to him by one "like the Son of man," to receive a kingdom. But if one part of the representation is not to be literally interpreted, why should the other be? It may be added, that it is nowhere said that this would literally occur.

(2) All that is fairly implied here is found in the latter interpretation. Such a prevalence of the principles of the gospel would meet the force of the language, and every part of the vision would find a real fulfillment in that.

(a) The fact that it proceeds from God - represented as "the Ancient of days."

(b) The fact that it is given by him, or that the kingdom is made over by him to the Messiah.

(c) The fact that the Messiah would have such a kingdom; that is, that he would reign on the earth, in the hearts and lives of men.

(d) The fact that that kingdom would be universal - extending over all people.

(e) And the fact that it would be perpetual; that is, that it would extend down to the end of time, or the consummation of all things here, and that it would be then eternal in the heavens.

For a very full and ample illustration of this passage - so full and ample as to supersede the necessity of any additional illustration here, see the notes at Daniel 2:44-45.

15

Daniel 7:15

開啟正文

我但以理在靈裏愁煩——即我受了攪擾;或說我的心變得沉重憂傷。這大概是部分因為他未能完全明白這異象的意義,部分因為異象所指明之事的可畏與重大。使徒約翰也照樣說(Rev 5:4):「因為沒有配展開、配觀看那書卷的,我就大哭。」

在我身體之中——頁邊註如迦勒底文作「鞘」。所指的無疑是身體;它如此被稱呼,是因它是心靈的外殼——或說是靈魂插入其中之處,如劍在鞘中,並因死亡而從其中被抽出。Pliny 也用同樣的隱喻:Donec cremato co inimici remeanti animae velut vaginam ademerint。又如某哲學家因面貌醜陋而被亞歷山大大帝輕看,據說他回答說:Corpus hominis nil est nisi vagina gladii in qua anima reconditur。——Gesenius。比較 Lengerke, in loc.。另見 Job 27:8:「神奪取其命的時候還有甚麼指望呢」;或更恰切地說,抽出他的性命,如劍從鞘中被抽出一般。比較該處的註釋。另見 Buxtorf 的 Lexicon Tal. 頁 1307。這裏的意思很清楚——但以理心裏覺得憂傷愁煩,而這在他身體上產生了可覺察的影響。

我腦中的異象使我驚惶——頭在此被視為智力的所在,他把這些異象說成彷彿是由頭看見的。就是說,它們彷彿在他眼前經過。

英文原文

I Daniel was grieved in my spirit - That is, I was troubled; or my heart was made heavy and sad. This was probably in part because he did not fully understand the meaning of the vision, and partly on account of the fearful and momentous nature of what was indicated by it. So the apostle John Rev 5:4 says, "And I wept much because no man was found worthy to open and to read the book."

In the midst of my body - Margin, as in the Chaldee, sheath. The body is undoubtedly referred to, and is so called as the envelope of the mind - or as that in which the soul is inserted, as the sword is in the sheath, and from which it is drawn out by death. The same metaphor is employed by Pliny: Donec cremato co inimici remeanti animae velut vaginam ademerint. So, too, a certain philosopher, who was slighted by Alexander the Great on account of his ugly face, is said to have replied, Corpus hominis nil est nisi vagina gladii in qua anima reconditur. - Gesenius. Compare Lengerke, in loc. See also Job 27:8, "When God taketh away his soul;" or rather draws out his soul, as a sword is drawn out of the sheath. Compare the note at that place. See also Buxtorf's Lexicon Tal. p. 1307. The meaning here is plain - that Daniel felt sad and troubled in mind, and that this produced a sensible effect on his body.

And the visions of my head troubled me - The head is here regarded as the seat of the intellect, and he speaks of these visions as if they were seen by the head. That is, they seemed to pass before his eyes.

16

Daniel 7:16

開啟正文

我就近一位侍立者——即就近那些顯為侍立在寶座旁的天使中的一位(Daniel 7:10)。比較 Daniel 8:13;Zechariah 4:4-5;Revelation 7:13。但以理自然會設想,那些被看見圍繞寶座的天使必能就這題目給他信息;而但以理所領受的回答表明,他的期望並沒有錯。神常差用天使向人傳達重要的真理,或使他們作傳達他旨意的媒介。比較 Revelation 1:1;Acts 7:53;Hebrews 2:2。

他就將那事講解給我明白——他把那些表號的意思解釋了,使但以理得以明白。但以理似乎沒有把天使關於這異象所傳達的一切都記錄下來,但他保存了足夠多的部分,使我們可以明白它的大概意義。

英文原文

I came near unto one of them that stood by - That is, to one of the angels who appeared to stand near the throne. Daniel 7:10. Compare Daniel 8:13; Zechariah 4:4-5; Revelation 7:13. It was natural for Daniel to suppose that the angels who were seen encircling the throne would be able to give him information on the subject, and the answers which Daniel received show that he was not mistaken in his expectation. God has often employed angels to communicate important truths to men, or has made them the medium of communicating his will. Compare Revelation 1:1; Acts 7:53; Hebrews 2:2.

So he told me, and made me know the interpretation of the things - He explained the meaning of the symbols, so that Daniel understood them. It would seem probable that Daniel has not recorded all that the angel communicated respecting the vision, but he has preserved so much that we may understand its general signification.

17

Daniel 7:17

開啟正文

這四個大獸就是四王——即四個王或四個王朝。沒有理由認為它們指個別的君王;明顯的意思是,它們指地上相繼興起的四個政權或帝國。整個表象也使我們這樣理解;這段經文歷來也是如此解釋。拉丁武加大譯本譯作 regna;七十士譯本譯作 βασιλεῖαι(basileiai);路德譯作 Reiche;倫格克譯作 Konigreiche。這解釋也得 Daniel 7:23 的印證,那裏明說「第四獸就是世上第四國」;並見 Daniel 7:24。

必從地中興起——在 Daniel 7:2,四獸被描述為從海裏上來——海是動盪列國的表象。這裏同一觀念以更字面的方式表達:他們將似乎從這樣陷入大騷動的地中長出來。這些王朝將在地上,並在一切事上顯明其屬地的來源。也許這些話也意在標明這四個王朝與其後那個王朝——那將出於天的——之間的鮮明對比。這就是關於異象含義所給的一般提示;就前三個而言,但以理對這解釋立即滿意;但第四獸似乎表明更奧祕、更重大的事,為此他便進一步尋求更具體的解釋。

英文原文

These great beasts, which are four, are four kings - Four kings or four dynasties. There is no reason for supposing that they refer to individual kings, but the obvious meaning is, that they refer to four dominions or empires that would succeed one another on the earth. So the whole representation leads us to suppose, and so the passage has been always interpreted. The Latin Vulgate renders it regna; the Septuagint βασιλεῖαι basileiai; Luther, Reiche; Lengerke, Konigreiche. This interpretation is confirmed, also, by Daniel 7:23, where it is expressly said that "the fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth." See also Daniel 7:24.

Which shall arise out of the earth - In Daniel 7:2 the beasts are represented as coming up from the sea - the emblem of agitated nations. Here the same idea is presented more literally - that they would seem to spring up out of the earth, thus thrown into wild commotion. These dynasties were to be upon the earth, and they were in all things to indicate their earthly origin. Perhaps, also, it is designed by these words to denote a marked contrast between these four dynasties and the one that would follow - which would be of heavenly origin. This was the general intimation which was given to the meaning of the vision, and he was satisfied at once as to the explanation, so far as the first three were concerned; but the fourth seemed to indicate more mysterious and important events, and respecting this he was induced to ask a more particular explanation.

18

Daniel 7:18

開啟正文

然而,至高者的聖民必要得國享受——即他們最終必取得對全世界的統治,並從那時起直到末了掌管它。這是異象所要揭示的中心大事,其用意顯然是要把人的心固定在這上面。此前的一切都是預備性的、從屬的;一切都指向這個。譯作「至高者」的字——旁註作「高者,即事物或處所」——עליונין(‛eleyônı̂yn)是複數,字面意思是「高者」;但這裏無疑指神,如此稱呼祂,正如 אלהים('ĕlohı̂ym)一字(Genesis 1:1 等處)一樣,是表示威嚴或尊貴的卓越複數(pluralis excellentice)。譯作「聖民」的字意思是聖者,無疑指地上神的子民;這裏的意思是:他們將取得國度,就是他們將要作王。當真正的宗教到處盛行,當一切職位都落在好人——敬畏神、遵守祂誡命的人——手中,而不是像通常那樣落在壞人手中時,這預言就其合理含義的一切方面而言,便要應驗。

他們必得國享受,直到永永遠遠——這是一個有力而著重強調的宣告,斷言這統治將存到永遠。它不像別國那樣過去、再由別國接續。如上所述,若這樣的統治在地上持續到萬事的終局,隨後由天上永恆的聖潔之治所接續,這裏所斷言的便是真實的。不必把這話解釋為地上將按字面有個永恆的國度,因為聖經處處教導,現今的秩序將要結束。但這話似乎必須理解為:將來地上會有一個義普及的狀態,而它一經引進,就必持續到時間的末了。

英文原文

But the saints of the Most High shall take the kingdom - That is, they shall ultimately take possession of the rule over all the world, and shall control it from that time onward to the end. This is the grand thing which the vision is designed to disclose, and on this it was evidently the intention to fix the mind. Everything before was preparatory and subordinate to this, and to this all things tended. The phrase rendered the Most High - in the margin "high ones, i. e., things or places" - עליונין ‛eleyônı̂yn - is in the plural number, and means literally high ones; but there can be no doubt that it refers here to God, and is given to Him as the word אלהים 'ĕlohı̂ym is (Genesis 1:1, et saepe), to denote majesty or honor - pluralis excellentice. The word rendered saints means the holy, and the reference is undoubtedly to the people of God on the earth, meaning here that they would take possession of the kingdom, or that they would rule. When true religion shall everywhere prevail, and when all offices shall be in the hands of good men - of men that fear God and that keep his commandments - instead of being in the hands of bad men, as they generally have been, then this prediction will be accomplished in respect to all that is fairly implied in it.

And possess the kingdom for ever, even forever and ever - This is a strong and emphatic declaration, affirming that this dominion will be perpetual. It will not pass away, like the other kingdoms, to be succeeded by another one. What is here affirmed, as above remarked, will be true if such a reign should continue on earth to the winding up of all things, and should then be succeeded by an eternal reign of holiness in the heavens. It is not necessary to interpret this as meaning that there would be literally an eternal kingdom on this earth, for it is everywhere taught in the Scriptures that the present order of things will come to a close. But it does seem necessary to understand this as teaching that there will be a state of prevalent righteousness on the earth hereafter, and that when that is introduced it will continue to the end of time.

19

Daniel 7:19

開啟正文

那時我願知道第四獸的真情——我渴望特別知道它所象徵的是甚麼。看來,關於頭三個獸,但以理已滿足於最概括的提示,因為它們所代表的王國似乎沒有甚麼特別之處。第四獸卻不然:那獸本身如此奇異——如此兇猛可怖;角的數目如此之多;小角的長出如此驚人;那角的性格如此反常;加於它的審判如此莊嚴;還有那位像人子的來取得國度的異象——這一切如此可畏、如此不凡,以致但以理的心大受震動,懇切尋求更進一步的解釋。但以理在這裏對獸和角的描述,大體上仍是重述他先前所描述的情形;但他補充了幾點先前略去的細節,都是為使人心更深地感受這異象可畏的性質和重大的意義——例如它有銅爪、並與聖民爭戰這些事實。

與其餘的獸不同——形態和性質都不同;不同到足以引人特別注意,並留下它代表著某種非常獨特、非常不凡之物的印象。見 Daniel 7:7 的註釋。

甚是可怕——見 Daniel 7:7 的註釋。

有銅爪——這細節在第一次的描述(Daniel 7:7)中沒有提及。它與描述中牙齒是鐵的那一部分十分相合,旨在表明那獸所象徵之國的可怖與猙獰。

吞吃……——見 Daniel 7:7 的註釋。

英文原文

Then I would know the truth of the fourth beast - I desired to know particularly what was symbolized by that. He appears to have been satisfied with the most general intimations in regard to the first three beasts, for the kingdoms represented by them seemed to have nothing very remarkable. But it was different in regard to the fourth. The beast itself was so remarkable - so fierce and terrific; the number of the horns was so great; the springing up of the little horn was so surprising; the character of that horn was so unusual; the judgment passed on it was so solemn; and the vision of one like the Son of man coming to take possession of the kingdom - all these things were of so fearful and so uncommon a character, that the mind of Daniel was peculiarly affected in view of them, and he sought earnestly for a further explanation. In the description that Daniel here gives of the beast and the horns, he refers in the main to the same cirumstances which he had before described; but he adds a few which he had before omitted, all tending to impress the mind more deeply with the fearful character and the momentous import of the vision; as, for instance, the fact that it had nails of brass, and made war with the saints.

Which was diverse from all the others - Different in its form and character; - so different as to attract particular attention, and to leave the impression that something very peculiar and remarkable was denoted by it. Notes, Daniel 7:7.

Exceeding dreadful - Notes, Daniel 7:7.

And his nails of brass - This circumstance is not mentioned in the first statement, Daniel 7:7. It accords well with the other part of the description, that his teeth were of iron, and is designed to denote the fearful and terrific character of tho kingdom, symbolized by the beast.

Which devoured ... - See the notes at Daniel 7:7.

20

Daniel 7:20

開啟正文

頭有十角……——見 Daniel 7:7-8 的註釋。

其形狀比同列的更誇張——直譯是「其外貌比同伴的更大」。這不是說它的面目或外貌比其他的更兇猛嚴厲,而是說那角的形象更大——רב(rab)。在 Daniel 7:8,這角被描寫為「小角」;要理解並調和兩者,我們必須設想:先見看着這角逐漸長大,直到成為眾角中最大的。三個角在它面前傾倒,它在體積上超過了其餘一切,終於成為最顯著的。這清楚表明:這第十一個角所指的王國或權柄,必比其他任何一個更鮮明突出——必成為如此顯赫重要,以致實際上集中並體現了那獸的全部權勢。

英文原文

And of the ten horns ... - See the notes at Daniel 7:7-8.

Whose look was more stout than his fellows - literally, "whose aspect was greater than that of its companions." This does not mean that its look or aspect was more fierce or severe than that of the others, but that the appearance of the horn was greater - רב rab. In Daniel 7:8, this is described as a "little horn;" and to understand this, and reconcile the two, we must suppose that the seer watched this as it grew until it became the largest of the number. Three fell before it, and it outgrew in size all the others until it became the most prominent. This would clearly denote that the kingdom or the authority referred to by this eleventh horn would be more distinct and prominent than either of the others - would become so conspicuous and important as in fact to concentrate and embody all the power of the beast.

21

Daniel 7:21

開啟正文

我觀看,見這角與聖民爭戰——我繼續觀看這角,直到看見它與神的子民爭戰。這情形在第一次的描述中也沒有提及;而描述的時序似乎表明,與聖民的戰爭要在這角初現之後相當久的時期才發生,或只在它長到極大、權勢極盛之時。這「戰爭」可以指按常規方式進行的公開敵對,也可以指逼迫,或指對他人權利與特權的任何侵犯。它既是「與聖民的戰爭」,最自然的所指便是逼迫。

勝了他們——即他勝過並制伏了他們;他比他們強,他們無力抵擋。顯然相同的事件、以幾乎相同的措辭——大概引自但以理書——見於 Revelation 13:5-7:「又賜給他說誇大褻瀆話的口,又有權柄賜給他,可以行事四十二個月。獸就開口向神說褻瀆的話,褻瀆神的名並他的帳幕,以及那些住在天上的。又任憑他與聖徒爭戰,並且得勝;也把權柄賜給他,制伏各族、各民、各方、各國。」

英文原文

I beheld, and the same horn made war with the saints - I continued to look on this until I saw war made by this horn with the people of God. This circumstance, also, is not referred to in the first description, and the order of time in the description would seem to imply that the war with the saints would be at a considerable period after the first appearance of the horn, or would be only when it had grown to its great size and power. This "war" might refer to open hostilities, carried on in the usual manner of war; or to persecution, or to any invasion of the rights and privileges of others. As it is a "war with the saints," it would be most natural to refer it to persecution.

And prevailed against them - That is, he overcame and subdued them, he was stronger than they were, and they were not able to resist him. The same events are evidently referred to and in almost similar language - borrowed probably from Daniel - in Revelation 13:5-7 : "And there was given him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies, and power was given unto him to continue forty and two months. And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God, to blaspheme his name, and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven. And it was given him to make war with the saints, and to overcome them; and power was given him over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations."

22

Daniel 7:22

開啟正文

直到亙古常在者來到——見 Daniel 7:9 的註釋。即這事要在那角長成全形、並與聖民爭戰而勝過他們之後發生。經文並沒有斷言這會隨即發生,而是說在此之後的某個時期,亙古常在者要來,在地上建立一個國度,或把國度交給聖民。那將是真實的移交、真實的特殊國度之設立,正如神親自顯現於地、公開把統治權交給他們一樣。

給至高者的聖民伸冤——即這事上有一個莊嚴的審判行動,藉此國度交在他們手中。那是真實的移交,如同對那獸宣判、把它定罪傾覆,並把它一度握有的統治權轉交給至高者的僕人一般。

聖民得國的時候就到了——即他們在地上作王;善人制定並執行法律;宗教的原則盛行,感化眾人之心,使公義公平得以施行。真宗教普及各地、掌管人心與生活、並使人凡事行所當行,便是這裏所說一切的完全應驗。以上是但以理所見、並切望得知其解釋的異象之描述;隨後便是那解釋,涵蓋本章餘下的部分。

英文原文

Until the Ancient of days came - Notes, Daniel 7:9. That is, this was to occur after the horn grew to its full size, and after the war was made with the saints, and they had been overcome. It does not affirm that this would occur immediately, but that at some subsequent period the Ancient of days would come, and would set up a kingdom on the earth, or would make over the kingdom to the saints. There would be as real a transfer and as actual a setting up of a peculiar kingdom, as if God himself should appear on the earth, and should publicly make over the dominion to them.

And judgment was given to the saints of the Most High - That is, there was a solemn act of judgement in the case by which the kingdom was given to their hands. It was as real a transfer as if there had been a judgment pronounced on the beast, and he had been condemned and overthrown, and as if the dominion which he once had should be made over to the servants of the Most High.

And the time came that the saints possessed the kingdom - That they ruled on the earth; that good men made and administered the laws; that the principles of religion prevailed, influencing the hearts of all men, and causing righteousness and justice to be done. The universal prevalence of true religion, in controlling the hearts and lives of men, and disposing them to do what in all circumstances ought to be done, would be a complete fulfillment of all that is here said. Thus far the description of what Daniel saw, of which he was so desirous to obtain an explanation. The explanation follows, and embraces the remainder of the chapter.

23

Daniel 7:23

開啟正文

他這樣說……——即解釋那出現的第四個表號——第四獸——以及與其顯現相連的事件。這解釋涵蓋本章餘下的部分;正如解釋之前整個題目在但以理看來艱深而重大,如今也可以說,它在許多方面仍艱深,在一切方面仍重大。它指甚麼、是否已經應驗、還是延伸至未來,聖經解釋者意見殊不一致;因此,若可能,判定其真義便十分重要。擺在我們面前的兩個探究是:第一,天使所用解釋的話公平地含蘊甚麼——即按這些話的公正解釋,所指之事的進程將如何;或說,在這預言應驗時,我們自然應期望在地上實際發生甚麼?第二,這預言實際應用於甚麼事件——已發生的事,還是將要發生的事;我們能否在已成過去的事中找到其應驗,還是應把它應用於部分尚屬未來的事件?這將引我們先陳明關於這國所斷言將發生的事,再探究其應用。

天使的解釋公平地含蘊甚麼?其中包括以下各點:

(1)地上將有第四個王國:「第四獸就是地上必得的第四國」(Daniel 7:23)。它將繼獅、熊、豹所象徵的三國之後。經文不再論那三國,卻充分陳明這國的特性。這些特性(已在 Daniel 7:7 的註釋中解釋,此處重複)是:(a)它將在重要方面與別國不同;(b)它將吞吃或制伏全地;(c)它將踐踏打碎它——即它將是一個兇猛好戰的普世王朝,以武力使全世界屈服臣服。

(2)從這主權或統治權中將興起十個權勢:「至於那十角,就是從這國中必興起的十王」(Daniel 7:24)。比較 Daniel 7:7 的註釋。即:它們將出於這一個統治權,或這統治權將分裂為這些較小的主權,但顯然都出自同一王國,運用同一權勢。我們自然不應在王位的先後繼承中尋找其應驗,因為那種繼承本可以由代表整個統治權或王朝的獸本身來象徵;倒要在某種程度上出於同一權勢、或如今擁有並運用那一統治權之權柄的若干並立政權中尋找。若這裏所指的王國分裂成這樣數目的政權,或這些政權以任何方式取得了這權柄並加以運用,這一事實便表達了我們當在這國中尋找的東西。

(3)從這些主權或王國中將興起另一個具特殊性格的(Daniel 7:24-25)。其特性如下:(a)它將出於其他政權,或可說是同一權勢治理的一種形態——正如第十一角與十角同出一源——因此我們當尋找這權勢以某種方式與同一王國或王朝相連地運行。(b)它不與十角同時興起,而是「在它們之後」——所以我們當尋找在某種意義上繼其後的權勢。(c)它起初微小——如那角一樣(Daniel 7:8)——所以我們要在起初軟弱的某個權勢中尋找應驗。(d)它將長成強大的權勢——因為小角強大到拔出其餘三角(Daniel 7:8),且解釋中說他必制伏三王(Daniel 7:24)。(e)它必制伏「三王」,即十角中的三個——所以我們要在那權勢的某種彰顯中尋找應驗:或照字面傾覆其中之三,或奪去其權勢約三分之一。不過,既提及「三」這確切數目,倒暗示我們應期待某種確切的應驗——新興權勢將傾覆三個主權。(f)它必驕傲野心勃勃,尤其向神狂妄:「他必向至高者說誇大的話」(Daniel 7:25)。這裏譯作「向」的迦勒底文 לצד(letsad),字義是「在……之旁、對其一方」,繼而指「敵對」。武加大作 contra;希臘文作 πρὸς(pros)。這話將應驗於直接褻瀆神的人、反叛祂統治和權柄的人、抱怨祂的治理和律法的人、或對祂正當的要求口出嚴厲斥責之言的人身上;顯然也應驗於公開對抗真神之主張和權柄的人,或其全部主張的精神與姿態可公正地視為實際向祂說誇大話的人身上。(g)它將是逼迫的權勢:「必折磨至高者的聖民」(Daniel 7:25),即它以逼迫真正的聖徒——真正是神的朋友、事奉神的人——為特徵。(h)它必聲稱握有立法之權,即改變既定風俗和律法的權柄:「想改變節期和律法」(Daniel 7:25)。譯作「想」的字 סבר(sebar)更恰當地意為「盼望」;這裏的觀念是:他盼望並自信能改變節期和律法。武加大譯作「他自以為能改變時期等」。這裏所指的心境,是那想改變所論節期和律法、並指望自己能作成之人的心境。若有強烈如此行的意願,並相信能以某種方式作成,便符合這字所含的意思。他將對既有的節期或其他時令、以及既有的律法行使某種權柄,並決意改變它們以達成自己的目的。「節期」一詞——זמנין(zı̂mnı̂yn)——似本指某種既定或指定的時期,如為節慶所定的時期。格塞尼烏斯:「時間,特別指指定的時候、季節」(Ecclesiastes 3:1; Nehemiah 2:6; Esther 9:27, Esther 9:31)。倫格克譯作 Fest-Zeiten(節期之時),並解釋為聖日、節期(Leviticus 23:2, Leviticus 23:4, Leviticus 23:37, Leviticus 23:44)。所指無疑是這樣分別出來作節期或禁食的時期——奉獻給宗教事奉的季節;這裏所指的權勢想望確立的管轄權,便是掌控這些時期,藉廢除現有的、或以別的代替,而隨己意更改,以達成自己的目的。這些時節向來與宗教的狀態和進展直接相連;凡有權廢除現有節期、以別的代替、或設立新節期的人,便在宗教整體和一個國家之上握有重要的支配權。譯作「律法」的字 דת(dâth),雖可指任何法律,更恰當地是指宗教方面的律法。見 Daniel 6:5, Daniel 6:7, Daniel 6:12; Ezra 7:12, Ezra 7:21。倫格克也把它解釋為指宗教的律法或宗教。因此,這裏所指的管轄權,屬於宗教的律法和制度;其目的是要取得對這些的控制;它聲稱有權廢除現有的、另立新的;並決意以促進自身目的的方式行使這權柄。(i)它將持續一段確定的時期:「聖民必交付他手一載、二載、半載」(Daniel 7:25)。「他們」或指那些律法,或指百姓,即所論的權勢。毛雷爾把這話歸於「至高者的聖民」,意即他們必被交在他手中。這雖未明指,卻也許是最自然的解釋,意即他將在這段時期內對聖民擁有管轄權;若是這樣,意思便是:他將在指明的時期——一載、二載、半載——內,對他們擁有絕對的控制,或在他們以上建立統治。關於「一載、二載、半載」這說法,不必多言,解釋者之間意見極為分歧;關於未來事件的許多爭論,都繫於對這話以及啟示錄中類似說法的理解。第一個也是主要的探究,當然是其字面而本來的意義。這裏譯作「載」的字——עדן עדנין(‛ı̂dân、‛ı̂dânı̂yn)——就其本身而論,並不比我們的「時候」一詞更能指定任何確定固定的時期。見 Daniel 2:8-9, Daniel 2:21; Daniel 3:5, Daniel 3:15; Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, Daniel 4:25, Daniel 4:32; Daniel 7:12。其中有些例子,實際所指的時期是一年(Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23),但這並非用字所必然含有,而是由情形所限定的。就字而論,它可指一日、一週、一月、一年,或更大或更小的時間單位;實際所指的時期,必須由上下文決定。拉丁武加大作 ad tempus;希臘文作 ἕως καιροῦ(heōs kairou);敘利亞譯本、路德(作 eine Zeit)、倫格克亦然,都不確定。「一載」這說法準確表達了原文的意思。譯作「二載」的字是同一字的複數,但顯然帶雙數的意義(格塞尼烏斯《詞典》;倫格克該處)。明顯的意思是:如前述「一載」所指定的那樣兩載。「半載」一語,清楚指這樣一個時期的一半。因此,若這裏「一載」指一年,全部時期便是三年半。像這樣、或指同一時期的時間標示,在預言(但以理書和啟示錄)中出現多次;關乎未來預言之解釋的許多關鍵,都繫於其意義。這三年半等於四十二個月,或一千二百六十日——即 Revelation 11:2; Revelation 12:6 所提到的時期,啟示錄一書的解釋大有賴於它。關於這裏所指時期惟一重要的問題是:這是否應按字面理解為三年半,還是應採象徵的方法,以每一日代表一年,從而使所指的時間實際上是一千二百六十年。在這問題上,解釋者分為兩派,而且大概會一直如此;隨着採取哪一種觀點,他們或把這裏的事件指向安提阿古·伊皮法尼,或指向教皇權;或更準確地說,隨着他們傾向於把這些事件指向安提阿古還是教皇權,便在日子的意義上採取這一種或那一種解釋法。在查考這段經文的此際,目的只在於釋經的層面——把它當作語言本身來查考,不涉應用、不受任何應用意圖的偏倚;雖然或許無法獲得絕對的確定,以下幾點在釋經上可視為可信:(1)「載」字可視為指一年——我指一年,而非一週、一月或任何別的時期——因為一年是更顯著、更重要的時間單位;而一日、一週、一月太短,不能合理地設想為所指。由於沒有比一年更大的自然時期——自然界沒有一個周期如此顯著分明,足以由「載」字恰當地暗示——便不能設想指任何這樣的周期。而且這裏的用語如此明確——「一載、二載、半載」——當推想所指是某個確定而顯著的時期,而非泛指的時間。因此可以推定,就這詞的某種意義而言,所指為一年的時期。(2)這話並不禁止按字面應用於一年;那樣,實際所指的時間便是三年半。若給這話這樣的解釋,沒有任何解經法則、也沒有語言本身的任何東西會遭違犯;就這一點而論,無可辯論。(3)關於這話的象徵應用——把它理解為遠長於字面三年半的時期,即以每日代表一年,從而視之為一千二百六十年——也可作同樣的話。不能證明這違反預言的慣例,或為預言語言的性質所禁,因為沒有比表號更常見的,而且實有必須如此理解的實例:如 Ezekiel 4:6,先知奉命向右側臥四十日,經文明說這是表號:「我給你定規,一日頂一年。」無人能否認,設想這裏的時期可為表號、所指可比字面解釋所要求的更長,是嚴格符合預言慣例的。(4)還可補充:即使僅就語言的解釋而觀、不涉應用問題,也有若干情形使這一點顯得可信。這些情形包括:(a)在預言中,照字面指定時間並不常見;幾乎舉不出幾個這樣的例子。通常的指定,或藉某種表號、某種標記、所指時代或時期的某種特點,或藉事件發生後才能明白的某種表記。(b)這時間的指定位於表號之中——滿是表號之處:眾獸、眾角、小角等;看來,指明所論時期時採用這樣的方法,遠比字面的方法更為可信。(c)僅就誦讀這段經文而言,也很明顯:這些事件確實延伸到遙遠的未來——遠超三年半這短暫時期所指的範圍。這一點將在本預言意義的探究中於別處更充分討論。(並見啟示錄註釋卷編者序。)(4)解釋者向但以理所給解釋的第四點是:關於這這權勢將有一場莊嚴的審判;一時容許它在聖民以上的統治權必全然被奪去,權勢本身也被毀滅:「然而,審判者必坐著行審判,他的權柄必被奪去,毀壞,滅絕,一直到底」(Daniel 7:26)。即:它必被奪去,徹底終結。解釋者沒有說這由誰成就,卻斷言這事實,並斷言其統治權的毀滅是最終的——即它必完全而永遠止息。這將藉神審判的作為而成,如同召開莊嚴的審判、宣判刑罰一般;它之為神的作為,將如神親自坐堂判案一樣明顯。見 Daniel 7:9-11 的註釋。(5)解釋者所給解釋的第五點是:全天下的統治權必賜給至高者的聖民,列國都必事奉祂——即地上將有公義的普及,神必在世人的心裏和生命中掌權(Daniel 7:27)。見 Daniel 7:13-14 的註釋。

英文原文

Thus he said ... - That is, in explanation of the fourth symbol which appeared - the fourth beast, and of the events connected with his appearing. This explanation embraces the remainder of the chapter; and as the whole subject appeared difficult and momentous to Daniel before the explanation, so it may be said to be in many respects difficult, and in all respects momentous still. It is a question on which expositors of the Scriptures are by no means agreed, to what it refers, and whether it has been already accomplished, or whether it extends still into the future; and it is of importance, therefore, to determine, if possible, what is its true meaning. The two points of inquiry which are properly before us are, first, What do the words of explanation as used by the angel fairly imply - that is, what, according to the fair interpretation of these words, would be the course of events referred to, or what should we naturally expect to find as actually occurring on the earth in the fulfillment of this? and, secondly, To what events the prophecy is actually to be applied - whether to what has already occurred, or what is yet to occur; whether we can find anything in what is now past which would be an accomplishment of this, or whether it is to be applied to events a part of which are yet future? This will lead us into a statement of the points which it is affirmed would occur in regard to this kingdom: and then into an inquiry respecting the application.

What is fairly implied in the explanation of the angel? This would embrace the following points:

(1) There was to be a fourth kingdom on the earth: "the fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth," Daniel 7:23. This was to succeed the other three, symbolized by the lion, the bear, and the leopard. No further reference is made to them, but the characteristics of this are fully stated. Those characteristics, which have been explained in the notes at Daniel 7:7, are, as here repeated,

(a) that it would be in important respects different from the others;

(b) that it would devour, or subdue the whole earth;

(c) that it would tread it down and break it in pieces; that is, it would be a universal dynasty, of a fierce and warlike character, that would keep the whole world subdued and subject by power.

(2) out of this sovereignty or dominion, ten powers would arise Daniel 7:24 : "and the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise." Compare the notes at Daniel 7:7. That is, they would spring out of this one dominion, or it would be broken up into these minor sovereignties, yet all manifestly springing from the one kingdom, and wielding the same power. We should not naturally look for the fulfillment of this in a succession of kings, for that would have been symbolized by the beast itself representing the entire dominion or dynasty, but rather to a number of contemporaneous powers that had somehow sprung out of the one power, or that now possessed and wielded the power of that one dominion. If the kingdom here referred to should be broken up into such a number of powers, or if in any way these powers became possessed of this authority, and wielded it, such a fact would express what we are to expect to find in this kingdom.

(3) From the midst of these sovereignties or kingdoms there was to spring up another one of peculiar characteristics, Daniel 7:24-25. These characteristics are the following:

(a) That it would spring out of the others, or be, as it were, one form of the administration of the same power - as the eleventh horn sprang from the same source as the ten, and we are, therefore, to look for the exercise of this power somehow in connection with the same kingdom or dynasty.

(b) This would not spring up contemporaneously with the ten, but would arise "after them" - and we are to look for the power as in some sense succeeding them.

(c) It would be small at first - as was the horn Daniel 7:8, and we are to look for the fulfillment in some power that would be feeble at first.

(d) It would grow to be a mighty power for the little horn became so powerful as to pluck up three of the others Daniel 7:8, and it is said in the explanation Daniel 7:24, that he would subdue three of the kings.

(e) It would subdue "three kings;" that is, three of the ten, and we are to look for the fulfillment in some manifestation of that power by which, either literally three of them were overthrown, or by which about one-third of their power was taken away. The mention of the exact number of "three," however, would rather seem to imply that we are to expect some such exact fulfillment, or some prostration of three sovereignties by the new power that would arise.

(f) It would be proud, and ambitious, and particularly arrogant against God: "and he shall speak great words against the Most High," Daniel 7:25. The Chaldee here rendered against - לצד letsad - means, literally, at, or against the part of it, and then against. Vulgate contra; Greek πρὸς pros. This would be fulfilled in one who would blaspheme God directly; or who would be rebellious against his government and authority; or who would complain of his administration and laws; or who would give utterance to harsh and reproachful words against his real claims. It would find a fulfillment obviously in an open opposer of the claims and the authority of the true God; or in one the whole spirit and bearing of whose pretensions might be fairly construed as in fact an utterance of great words against him.

(g) This would be a persecuting power: "and shall wear out the saints of the Most High," Daniel 7:25. That is, it would be characterized by a persecution of the real saints - of those who were truly the friends of God, and who served him.

(h) It would claim legislative power, the power of changing established customs and laws: "and think to change times and laws," Daniel 7:25. The word rendered "think" (סבר sebar) means, more properly, to hope; and the idea here is, that he hopes and trusts to be able to change times and laws. Vulgate, Putabit quod possit mutare tempora, etc. The state of mind here referred to would be that of one who would desire to produce changes in regard to the times and laws referred to, and who would hope that he would be able to effect it. If there was a strong wish to do this, and if there was a belief that in any way he could bring it about, it would meet what is implied in the use of the word here. There would be the exercise of some kind of authority in regard to existing times for festivals, or other occasions, and to existing laws, and there would be a purpose so to change them as to accomplish his own ends.

The word "times" - זמנין zı̂mnı̂yn - would seem to refer properly to some stated or designated times - as times appointed for festivals, etc. Gesenius, "time, specially an appointed time, season:" Ecclesiastes 3:1; Nehemiah 2:6; Esther 9:27, Esther 9:31. Lengerke renders the word Fest-Zeiten - "festival times," and explains it as meaning the holy times, festival days, Leviticus 23:2, Leviticus 23:4, Leviticus 23:37, Leviticus 23:44. The allusion is, undoubtedly, to such periods set apart as festivals or fasts - seasons consecrated to the services of religion and the kind of jurisdiction which the power here referred to would hope and desire to set up would be to have control of these periods, and so to change and alter them as to accomplish his own purposes - either by abolishing those in existence, or by substituting others in their place. At all times these seasons have had a direct connection with the state and progress of religion; and he who has power over them, either to abolish existing festivals, or to substitute others in their places, or to appoint new festivals, has an important control over the whole subject of religion, and over a nation.

The word rendered "laws" here - דת dâth - while it might refer to any law, would more properly designate laws pertaining to religion. See Daniel 6:5, Daniel 6:7, Daniel 6:12 (Daniel 6:6, Daniel 6:9, Daniel 6:13); Ezra 7:12, Ezra 7:21. So Lengerke explains it as referring to the laws of religion, or to religion. The kind of jurisdiction, therefore, referred to in this place would be what would pertain to the laws and institutions of religion; it would be a purpose to obtain the control of these; it would be a claim of right to abolish such as existed, and to institute new ones; it would be a determination to exert this power in such a way as to promote its own ends.

(i) It would continue for a definite period: "and they shall be given into his hands until a time and times and the dividing of time," Daniel 7:25. They; that is, either those laws, or the people, the powers referred to. Maurer refers this to the "saints of the Most High," as meaning that they would be delivered into his hands. Though this is not designated expressly, yet perhaps it is the most natural construction, as meaning that he would have jurisdiction over the saints during this period; and if so, then the meaning is, that he would have absolute control over them, or set up a dominion over them, for the time specified the time, and times, etc. In regard to this expression "a time and times, etc., it is unnecessary to say that there has been great diversity of opinion among expositors, and that many of the controversies in respect to future events turn on the sense attached to this and to the similar expressions which occur in the book of Revelation. The first and main inquiry pertains, of course, to its literal and proper signification. The word used here rendered "time, times, time" - עדן עדנין ‛ı̂dânı̂yn ‛ı̂dân - is a word which in itself would no more designate any definite and fixed period than our word time does.

See Daniel 2:8-9, Daniel 2:21; Daniel 3:5, Daniel 3:15; Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, Daniel 4:25, Daniel 4:32; Daniel 7:12. In some of these instances, the period actually referred to was a year Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, but this is not necessarily implied in the word used, but the limitation is demanded by the circumstances of the case. So far as the word is concerned, it would denote a day, a week, a month, a year, or a larger or smaller division of time, and the period actually intended to be designated must be determined from the connection. The Latin Vulgate is indefinite - ad tempus; so the Greek - ἕως καιροῦ heōs kairou; so the Syriac, and so Luther - eine Zeit; and so Lengerke - eine Zeit. The phrase "for a time" expresses accurately the meaning of the original word. The word rendered "times" is the same word in the plural, though evidently with a dual signification. - Gesenius, Lexicon; Lengerke, in loc. The obvious meaning is two such times as is designated by the former "time."

The phrase "and the dividing of a time" means clearly half of such a period. Thus, if the period denoted by a "time," here be a year, the whole period would be three years and a half. Designations of time like this, or of this same period, occur several times in the prophecies (Daniel and Revelation), and on their meaning much depends in regard to the interpretation of the prophecies pertaining to the future. This period of three years and a half equals forty-two months, or twelve hundred and sixty days - the periods mentioned in Revelation 11:2; Revelation 12:6, and on which so much depends in the interpretation of that book. The only question of importance in regard to the period of time here designated is, whether this is to be taken literally to denote three years and a half, or whether a symbolic method is to be adopted, by making each one of the days represent a year, thus making the time referred to, in fact, twelve hundred and sixty years. On this question expositors are divided, and probably will continue to be, and according as one or the other view is adopted, they refer the events here to Antiochus Epiphanes, or to the Papal power; or perhaps it should be said more accurately, according as they are disposed to refer the events here to Antiochus or to the Papacy, do they embrace one or the other method of interpretation in regard to the meaning of the days. At this point in the examination of the passage, the only object is to look at it exegetically; to examine it as language apart from the application, or unbiassed by any purpose of application; and though absolute certainty cannot perhaps be obtained, yet the following may be regarded as exegetically probable:

(1) The word time may be viewed as denoting a year: I mean a year rather than a week, a month, or any other period - because a year is a more marked and important portion of time, and because a day, a week, a month, is so short that it cannot be reasonably supposed that it is intended. As there is no larger natural period than a year - no cycle in nature that is so marked and obvious as to be properly suggested by the word time, it cannot be supposed that any such cycle is intended. And as there is so much particularity in the language used here, "a time, and times, and half a time," it is to be presumed that some definite and marked period is intended, and that it is not time in general. It may be presumed, therefore, that in some sense of the term the period of a year is referred to.

(2) The language does not forbid the application to a literal year, and then the actual time designated would be three years and a half. No laws of exegesis, nothing in the language itself, could be regarded as violated, if such an interpretation were given to the language, and so far as this point is concerned, there would be no room for debate.

(3) The same remark may be made as to the symbolic application of the language - taking it for a much longer period than literally three years and a half; that is, regarding each day as standing for a year, and thus considering it as denoting twelve hundred and sixty years. This could not be shown to be a violation of prophetic usage, or to be forbidden by the nature of prophetic language, because nothing is more common than symbols, and because there are actual instances in which such an interpretation must be understood. Thus in Ezekiel 4:6, where the prophet was commanded to lie upon his right side forty days, it is expressly said that it was symbolic or emblematic: "I have appointed thee each day for a year." No one can doubt that it would be strictly consistent with prophetic usage to suppose that the time here might be symbolic, and that a longer time might be referred to than the literal interpretation would require.

(4) It may be added, that there are some circumstances, even considering the passage with reference only to the interpretation of the language, and with no view to the question of its application, which would make this appear probable. Among these circumstances are the following:

(a) the fact that, in the prophecies, it is unusual to designate the time literally. Very few instances can be referred to in which this is done. It is commonly by some symbol; some mark; some peculiarity of the time or age referred to, that the designation is made, or by some symbol that may be understood when the event has occurred.

(b) This designation of time occurs in the midst of symbols - where all is symbol - the beasts, the horns, the little horn, etc.; and it would seem to be much more probable that such method would be adopted as designating the time referred to than a literal method.

(c) It is quite apparent on the mere perusal of the passage here that the events do actually extend far into the future - far beyond what would be denoted by the brief period of three and a half years. This will be considered more fully in another place in the inquiry as to the meaning of these prophecies. (See also Editor's Preface to volume on Revelation.)

(4) a fourth point in the explanation given by the interpreter to Daniel is, that there would be a solemn judgment in regard to this power, and that the dominion conceded to it over the saints for a time would be utterly taken away, and the power itself destroyed: "but the judgment shall sit, and they shall take away his dominion, to consume, and to destroy it unto the end," Daniel 7:26. That is, it shall be taken away; it shall come entirely to an end. The interpreter does not say by whom this would be done, but he asserts the fact, and that the destruction of the dominion would be final. That is, it would entirely and forever cease. This would be done by an act of Divine judgment, or as if a solemn judgment should be held, and a sentence pronounced. It would be as manifestly an act of God as if he should sit as a judge, and pronounce sentence. See the notes at Daniel 7:9-11.

(5) And, a fifth point in the explanation of the interpreter is, that the dominion under the whole heaven would be given to the saints of the Most High, and that all nations should serve him; that is, that there would be a universal prevalence of righteousness on the earth, and that God would reign in the hearts and lives of men, Daniel 7:27. See the notes at Daniel 7:13-14.

28

Daniel 7:28

開啟正文

「那事到此完畢」——即我所見所聞之事的終局。這就是向先知揭示之事的全部總和;但他仍說,他以極深的興趣默想此事,並對這些重大事件心懷許多掛慮。譯作「到此」的字,意為「至此」或「到這地步」。「那事到此完畢」這話的意思是「所述之事的終結」;即這就是他所領受的全部啟示,其餘的他只能留給自己去默想。

「至於我但以理」——就我本人而論;或說,就此事對我本人的影響而言。在這非凡異象結束之際,陳明它對他自己的影響,並非不自然。

「我的思念極其驚擾我」——即我關乎此事的思想。這是一個他無法不反覆思想的主題,也必然使他對將臨之事深懷憂慮。誰能察看未來而不生焦慮激盪之念呢?這些事件足以吸引至深的注意,足以使人的心思凝於莊嚴的思索。比較 Revelation 5:4 的註釋。

「我的臉色在我身上改變了」——這些啟示的效應顯明在他的容貌上。先知沒有說是在哪方面——是使他蒼白、憔悴,還是憂慮,只說它使他的外貌改變了。迦勒底原文作「明亮」——זיו(zı̂yv)——其含意似乎是他明亮愉快的面容改變了;即他明朗的神色改變了:或變得蒼白(格塞尼烏斯、倫格克),或變得嚴肅而沉思。

「我卻將那事存記在心」——我沒有向任何人透露我深憂焦思的原因。他把整個題目隱藏在自己心裏,直到他以為合宜,才把他所見所聞記錄下來。也許沒有人能聆聽這事而加以相信;也許宮中沒有人會同情他;也許他以為此事若為人所知,難免有自炫之嫌;也許他覺得,既然無人能在這題目上提供新的亮光,拿它作談論的題目也屬無益;也許他感到如此震懾,以致不能輕易談論它。

如今我們既已完成了本章關乎表號、字詞與片語含義的解釋,便可以進而探究這非凡預言所指的事件,並追問它原本要描繪的是甚麼事件。關乎此點,只有兩種意見、或兩類解釋,需要留意:一種認為它首要而專一地指安提阿古·伊皮法尼;另一種認為它指教皇權的興起與性質;一種視第四獸為亞歷山大帝國、小角為安提阿古;另一種視第四獸為羅馬帝國、小角為教皇的統治權。在探究哪一種是真解釋時,合宜的做法是:第一,考慮它是否適用於安提阿古·伊皮法尼;第二,它是否確實在羅馬帝國與教皇權中找到應驗;第三,若這才是正確的應用,那麼在這預言尚未應驗的部分,我們對未來當期待甚麼。

一、這預言是否適用於安提阿古·伊皮法尼的問題。一大群最具聲望的解釋者——其中有倫格克、毛雷爾、斯圖亞特教授(《預言解釋的提示》(Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy),頁86以下;又《但以理書註釋》,頁205-211)、艾希霍恩、貝托爾特、布利克及其他許多人——認為對安提阿古的暗指十分明顯,這預言首要——若非專一——的指向就是他。斯圖亞特教授(《提示》,頁86)說:「Daniel 7:25 的段落清楚得沒有留下任何合理的懷疑餘地。」「在 Daniel 7:8、Daniel 7:20、Daniel 7:24,描述了安提阿古·伊皮法尼的興起;因為第四獸毫無合理疑問地,乃是繼亞歷山大大帝之後的分裂的希臘政權。從這王朝興起了安提阿古(Daniel 7:8、Daniel 7:20),他在 Daniel 7:25 中被最生動地描述為『一個必向至高者說誇大話的人』等。」

關乎安提阿古的事實,就本探究所需知道的,簡述如下:安提阿古·伊皮法尼(意即「顯赫者」,是他自己取的名號;普里多,iii. 213)是安提阿古大帝之子,但繼承其兄西流基·非羅帕托的王位,後者死於主前176年。安提阿古自主前176年至164年統治敘利亞,其首都為安提阿,位於俄隆提斯河上。他作為殘暴的暴君、猶太人最嗜血最苦毒的仇敵的品性,在《馬加比一書》《馬加比二書》中有詳細記載。另比較普里多,《續篇》(Con.)卷三頁213-234。關乎安提阿古、被認為與我們面前這預言之應用有關的事實,斯圖亞特教授(《預言解釋的提示》,頁89、90)如此陳述:「主前168年5月,安提阿古·伊皮法尼正進軍攻打埃及,途中派遣他的軍事親信之一阿波羅尼烏斯,帶兵二萬二千,去征服並劫掠耶路撒冷。這任務完全成功。耶路撒冷的男子遭到可怕的屠殺,大部分婦孺被擄,被賣為奴、受奴隸之待。聖殿的事奉中斷,其歡樂的節期變為哀悼(1 Macc. 1:37-39)。此後不久,猶太人普遍被迫吃豬肉、向偶像獻祭。同年十二月,聖殿因引入朱庇特·奧林匹烏的像而被褻瀆;該月二十五日,在耶和華的壇上向那偶像獻祭。這最後事件之後恰三年,即主前165年12月25日,聖殿被猶大·馬加比潔淨,耶和華的敬拜得以恢復。

「如此,三年半——或幾乎正是這段時期——過去了,其間安提阿古完全佔有並控制耶路撒冷城內外及聖殿的一切。還可以注意,從聖殿褻瀆達於頂點——即在耶和華的壇上向朱庇特·奧林匹烏的像獻祭——到猶大恢復正常敬拜,恰好過了三年。我提及這最後的情形,是為了解釋約瑟夫斯(《猶太古史》(Ant.) xii. 7,第6節)所記安提阿古褻瀆的時期為三年。若我們算到猶大·馬加比恢復聖殿敬拜之時,這時期與既成之褻瀆持續的時間完全吻合。但在《猶太戰爭史》序言(Prooem. ad Bell. Jud. 第7節)及《猶太戰爭史》卷一第1章第1節,約瑟夫斯以三年半為安提阿古蹂躪耶路撒冷和猶太的時期。」

關乎這段陳述,儘管大體事實正確,仍須作一些補充說明,以判定它對本案的真實意義。派遣阿波羅尼烏斯攻打耶路撒冷之舉,並不如上文所說,發生於安提阿古正在前往埃及途中,而是在他從埃及返回之時,且正值安提阿古攻取耶路撒冷之後兩年。——普里多,iii. 239。他派遣阿波羅尼烏斯的緣由,是安提阿古在埃及被羅馬人擊敗,怒不可遏,決意把他一切的忿怒發洩在猶太人身上,而猶太人當時並沒有特別開罪於他。兩年前安提阿古親自攻取耶路撒冷時,殺了四萬人;擄了同樣多的人,賣為奴隸;他闖入聖殿,進入至聖所;他命人在燔祭壇上獻一頭大母豬,以示他對聖殿和猶太宗教的蔑視;他把豬湯灑在聖殿各處,故意污穢它;他劫走聖殿的香壇、陳設餅桌和金燈臺,然後返回安提阿,立弗呂家人腓力——一個性情殘忍兇暴的人——為猶太人的總督。——普里多,iii. 231。

兩年後阿波羅尼烏斯再次攻城時,他靜候安息日,然後發動突襲。他使城中充滿血腥,放火焚城,拆毀房屋,夷平城牆,在聖殿對面建了一座堅固堡壘,駐軍可從其中襲擊一切前來敬拜的人。從此,「聖殿荒涼,每日的祭祀止息」,直到三年半後猶大·馬加比恢復事奉。這情形持續的時間,事實上正是三年半,直到猶大·馬加比成功把異教徒逐出聖殿和耶路撒冷,聖殿得了潔淨,並被莊嚴地重新奉獻給神的敬拜。見普里多,《續篇》iii. 240、241,及該處所引的權威。

如今,關乎這解釋,假定這預言論及安提阿古,就必須承認其中有若干非凡的吻合之處,而這預言之被應用於他,正是根據這些吻合。這些情形如下:

(a)「小角」所標示之權勢的一般特性,乃是嚴厲與殘酷。沒有比安提阿古·伊皮法尼的品性更適合表徵這一點的了。比較普里多,《續篇》iii. 213、214。

(b) 他的狂妄與褻瀆——「向至高者說誇大的話」。在安提阿古的品性中,要找到此事的應驗,再容易不過——他褻瀆地闖入至聖之所;他設立朱庇特的像;他在大壇上獻豬為祭;他出於對希伯來人及其敬拜的蔑視,把豬湯灑在聖殿上;他又使聖殿每日的祭止息。

(c) 他與「聖民」爭戰、「折磨至高者的聖民」——這一切都可以在安提阿古對猶太人發動的戰爭中找到應驗:他屠殺了千千萬萬的人,又把同樣多的人送入無望的奴役。

(d) 他企圖「改變節期和律法」——這也可以在安提阿古身上找到應驗——在他專斷的品性,以及他對希伯來人律法的干預。

(e) 時間,如上所述,乃是最不尋常的吻合之處。若不認為這專指安提阿古,就必須用以下兩個假設之一來解釋:或說這是歷史中偶爾會出現的那種巧合,正如夢中也會出現巧合一樣;或說它有雙重指涉,本意首先指安提阿古,但在次要而更重要的意義上,也指與此強烈相似的其他事件;換言之,這話語是特意如此措辭,使它關乎兩類相似的事件。然而,即使假定這設計原是描寫教皇權,能在安提阿古身上找到這些預言的應驗,也不算很了不起的事,因為其中一些表達的性質十分籠統,可以應用於已發生的許多事件;而且就事理而言,安提阿古與教皇權之間本有若干強烈的相似點。因此,並非絕對必須認為這是指安提阿古·伊皮法尼;而且反對這見解的理由如此之多,以致在我看來,它有這樣的指涉,在道德上是不可能的。這些反對理由中,有以下各項:

(1) 這解釋使瑪代和波斯國必須被分開,被視為兩個國,正如艾希霍恩、雅恩、德雷澤、德韋特、布利克所主張的。按這解釋,四獸所指的王國如下:第一獸指迦勒底;第二獸指瑪代;第三獸指波斯;第四獸指馬其頓,即亞歷山大大帝治下的馬其頓—亞細亞國。但姑不論其他難處,有一個無法逾越的反對理由:凡聖經中提到瑪代和波斯國之處,凡它們在預言應驗中扮演任何角色之處,它們總是被提及為一國。它們以一國出現;以一國行事;被視為一國。瑪代國直到與波斯國聯合才出現;而當它們被說成繼巴比倫國之後時,這一點尤為重要。瑪代國與巴比倫國是同時並存的;按這些表號的描述,真正繼巴比倫國之後的,乃是瑪代—波斯國。正如亨斯滕伯格所言,瑪代國只在巴比倫陷落後居亞克薩列二世在位期間,才可說繼了巴比倫國;而且即使在那短短兩年間,政權實際上也在古列手中。——《但以理書的真實性》(Die Authentic des Daniel),頁200。施洛瑟(頁243)說:「瑪代和波斯國應被視為事實上同一個國,只是在王朝更替中,另一分支取得了權柄。」特別參羅森米勒,《古代學》(Alterthumskunde),i. 290、291。這兩國事實上總是混合為一——它們的法律、風俗、宗教——並被提及為一。比較 Esther 1:3、Esther 1:18-19;Esther 10:2;Daniel 5:28;Daniel 6:8、Daniel 6:12、Daniel 6:15。

(2) 按這解釋,還必須把亞歷山大所創的帝國分開,不視之為一,而把他自己在位時存在的視為一國,把他的繼承者之一安提阿古的國視為另一國。這見解由貝托爾特主張,他認為第一獸代表巴比倫國;第二獸代表瑪代波斯國;第三獸代表亞歷山大之國;第四獸代表由此而出的諸國。這樣,就必須假定四個頭和翅膀、以及十角,都同樣代表那一國,或都出於它——四個頭代表亞歷山大死時分裂的國,十角代表最終從同一政權興起的諸權勢。但這與關乎亞細亞—馬其頓帝國的全部描述相悖。在 Daniel 8:8-9,有一處確然指涉那帝國的經文說:「這山羊極其自高自大,正強盛的時候,那大角折斷了,又在角根上向天的四方長出四個非常的角來。四角之中有一角長出一個小角,向南……極其高大。」這裏確然暗指亞歷山大及其後繼者,特別是安提阿古,卻完全沒有提到任何如第四獸代表東方繼亞歷山大之後的政權時所必須假設的那種分裂。在任何地方,亞歷山大繼承者之國都沒有在與瑪代波斯國之於巴比倫國、或亞歷山大之國之於波斯國相同的意義上,與亞歷山大之國分開。比較亨斯滕伯格,同上,頁203-205。

(3) 第四獸無論被視為亞歷山大之國,或照貝托爾特等人的看法,被視為亞歷山大繼承者之國,都決不符合這獸與其他諸獸相比時的特性。這獸遠比其他諸獸更可畏、更令人懼怕。它有鐵牙銅爪;它踐踏面前一切,把一切咬碎,顯然代表一個遠比其他諸獸更可怖的統治權。Daniel 2:33、Daniel 2:40 中以鐵的腿和腳代表第四國的平行描述也是如此——比金、銀、銅所代表的更可怖。但這描述決不符合亞歷山大或其繼承者之國的特性,事實上用在他們身上也不真實。正如我們將看到的,這描述與羅馬權勢十分吻合,即使與巴比倫、波斯、馬其頓相比也是如此;但若把它與之前的諸國相比,用在亞歷山大或其繼承者的帝國上,就決非恰當。比較亨斯滕伯格,同上,頁205-207。再者,這也不符合在一段確然指涉它的經文 (Daniel 8:22) 中,對這繼亞歷山大之後的權勢所明說的話:「至於那折斷了的角,在其根上又長出四角,這四角就是四國,必從這國裏興起來,只是權勢都不及他。」

(4) 按這假設,便無法確定第四獸 (Daniel 7:7) 的「十角」以及這些角所代表的「十王」(Daniel 7:24) 究竟是誰。但以理書中一切論及馬其頓國的話 (Daniel 7:6;Daniel 8:8、Daniel 8:22) 都暗示:馬其頓帝國在東方,當其創立者死後,將分裂為四大權勢或君主國——這與眾所周知的事實相符。但若第四獸代表這馬其頓權勢,那麼在這普遍的馬其頓權勢之下,那十王或十個主權體究竟是誰?貝托爾特認為十角是「十位敘利亞王」,第十一個小角是安提阿古·伊皮法尼。照貝托爾特(頁432、433),這些王的名字是:西流基·尼卡托、安提阿古·索特、安提阿古·提奧斯、西流基·卡利尼庫、西流基·克勞努、安提阿古大帝、西流基·非羅帕托、赫利奧多羅、多利買·非羅梅托、德米特里。斯圖亞特教授(《但以理書註釋》,頁208)亦然。但要從歷史中確切數出這個數目的敘利亞王,是不可能的;更不必說,假定他們的權勢由第四獸代表,其可能性也有問題。這些王並非同屬一個王朝,不屬敘利亞、馬其頓,也不屬埃及,這名單是由不同王國拼湊而成的。格羅提烏斯(見該處)從敘利亞王和埃及王的名單中湊出十王——五個出自一國,五個出自另一國;但這顯然違背預言的原意,因為預言是要把它們表徵為出於同一個權勢。這見解還有一個反對理由:這些都是先後繼位的王——一個接一個興起;而十角的描述卻會使我們假定它們同時並存,或說在同一大權勢所代表的第四獸之中,以某種方式興起了十個權勢。

(5) 按這假設,同樣難以知道那長於十角之中的小角所「拔出」的「三角」(Daniel 7:8) 究竟指誰。視「小角」為安提阿古·伊皮法尼的格羅提烏斯認為,三角是他的兄長——西流基、西流基之子德米特里、以及埃及王多利買·非羅帕托。但有一個無法逾越的反對理由:格羅提烏斯所提的三王,並不都在他自己的十王名單之內——無論多利買·非羅梅托(若他所指為非羅梅托),還是德米特里,都不在其列。——牛頓,《論預言》,頁211。他們也沒有被安提阿古或奉他之命連根拔出。西流基被他的司庫赫利奧多羅毒死——後者意在為自己篡奪王位——那時安提阿古還未從羅馬回來,他先前在那裏作人質多年。德米特里後來活得長久,廢黜並殺了安提阿古的兒子,繼承了敘利亞王位。多利買·非羅帕托在安提阿古登敘利亞王位之前近三十年,已作埃及王而死;若格羅提烏斯所指的是非羅梅托——這最有可能——那麼他雖在與安提阿古的戰爭中受苦甚多,卻比安提阿古多活了約十八年,死時仍擁有埃及王冠。——牛頓,同上。貝托爾特認為那三王是:毒死西流基·非羅帕托、企圖藉一黨之助奪位的赫利奧多羅;以國王外甥的身份聲稱對王位有分的埃及王多利買·非羅梅托;以及作為先王之子、乃王位合法繼承人的德米特里。但這見解有兩個反對理由:(a)先知筆下所寫的是實際的王——這些人卻不是;(b)安提阿古是和平登上王位的;那本應被視為敘利亞王的德米特里,無法確立自己的權利,被扣留在羅馬為人質。——亨斯滕伯格,頁207、208。斯圖亞特教授(《但以理書註釋》,頁208、209)認為所指的三王是赫利奧多羅、多利買·非羅梅托和德米特里一世;但關乎這些人,當注意的是,他們不過是王位的覬覦者,而但以理的經文假定他們將是實際的王。比較亨斯滕伯格,頁208。

(6) 這裏所提的時間,若照字面理解為三年半 (Daniel 7:25),便不符合安提阿古實際統治的時期。在一段確然指涉他的經文 (Daniel 8:13-14) 中說,「論及每日的祭祀、與那行毀壞之可憎的事」的異象,要「到二千三百日,聖所就必潔淨」;即比我們此處所提的時期多出一千零四十日,約合兩年十個月。我知道解釋這一點有其難處(見斯圖亞特教授,《預言解釋的提示》,頁98以下),而 Daniel 8:13-14 這段的確切含義,將在後文討論;但把「一載、二載、半載」(Daniel 7:25)應用於安提阿古,有一個相當有力的反對理由:別處應用於他的時間,與此處並不相同。

(7) 對這應用的最後一個反對理由是:預言中說,那由「小角」所代表者將存續,直到「亙古常在者坐著行審判」,顯然也要存續到那位像人子的得國之時 (Daniel 7:9-10、Daniel 7:13-14、Daniel 7:21-22、Daniel 7:26)。但若這是指安提阿古,那麼這些事件就必指彌賽亞的來臨、以及祂的國在世上的設立。然而事實上,安提阿古約在救主降生之前164年便死了,無法證明他存續到彌賽亞道成肉身之時。

在我看來,這些反對「此處指安提阿古·伊皮法尼」之見解的理由,是無法逾越的。

二、這預言是否指羅馬帝國與教皇權的問題。公正的探究是:異象中的諸事,是否確實在羅馬帝國與教皇權中找到這樣的對應,以致若這些表號是在事件發生之後採用的,它們也能公平地代表這些事件?假定預言所指的正是那些事件,它們是否適合我們如今用來描述其中已過的部分?為判定這一點,合宜的做法是回到表號中的各事,探究與之對應的事件是否確實在羅馬帝國與教皇權中發生過。回想上文對天使向但以理所作解釋的闡述,那裏提到的各事,將在羅馬帝國與教皇權中找到充份而鮮明的應驗。

(1) 由第四獸所象徵的第四國,準確地由羅馬權勢所代表。這在於那權勢將在世界歷史中佔據的位置——假定前三獸指巴比倫、瑪代波斯、馬其頓。按這假定,便無須把瑪代波斯帝國分為二、以兩個表號代表;也無須把亞歷山大所建之國——亞細亞—馬其頓——與其繼承者之國分開。瑪代波斯既事實上是一個政權,亞歷山大治下的馬其頓也是如此——連同它死後分裂而成的四個王朝的形態,直到這一切被羅馬的征服整個傾覆為止。按這假定,表號中的一切也都應驗了。第四獸——如此強大、如此可怖、如此有威力,與其他諸獸如此不同,牙齒如鐵、爪如銅,踐踏咬碎全地——恰好代表羅馬的統治權。這表號正是我們如今用來代表那權勢時會恰當採用的;那帝國在每一方面,都恰當地由這表號代表。還可以補充,這假定與 Daniel 2:33、Daniel 2:40 這平行經文的明顯解釋相符,那裏以像的鐵腿鐵腳指同一帝國。見該處的註釋。還當補充,這第四國應被視為貫穿羅馬權勢的整個延續期——以那權勢在地上存留的各種形態:無論在帝國之下,或分裂為各分立主權國之時,或再度集中體現於教皇權之下。照這裏的預言,那第四權勢或統治權將延續,直到聖徒之國的設立。那麼,聖徒之國要麼已經來到、已經設立,要麼第四國以某種形式至今仍在。

事實上,在預言中,整個羅馬統治權似乎被視為一——一個踐踏世界自由、逼迫神子民——就是真教會——並對人的心靈維持絕對專斷統治的巨大可畏權勢——一個攔阻真理進展、攔住聖徒在地上作王的巨大權勢。在這些方面,教皇的統治權向來不過是、如今也仍是異教羅馬影響力的另一形式的延續;而整個統治權可以被視為一體,並可由但以理異象中的第四獸來象徵。當那權勢終止時,我們便可以照預言期待「國必賜給聖徒」的時候,即神的真國在全地設立的時候。

(2) 從這由第四獸所代表的一個主權中,將興起由十角所代表的十個權勢或主權體。在上文的闡述中已說明,這些都將出於那一個統治權,並將運用那權勢所運用的權柄;即那一大權勢將被打破,分散為十所代表的數目。正如諸角同時出現在獸身上,並非先後長出,這些權勢也將同時並存,而非單純的先後相繼;又正如諸角都從獸長出,這些權勢也都同源,是那如今分為多數的同一大權勢的一部分。問題是:羅馬權勢是否確實在某個時期——如小角(若它指教皇權)興起所代表的時期——被分散為這樣多的主權國?其實,只要翻開任何一部史書,便可以看到羅馬權勢如何事實上以這種方式被分散、打破為大量王國或相對細小的主權體,佔據曾由羅馬治理的世界各地。在帝國的衰亡中,隨着「小角」所代表的新權勢興起,那先前運用的一統權勢徹底瓦解,大量邦國王國從其中興起。

要看出湊足十這個數目並無難處,或這樣的分散與打破乃自然提示,我隨眼瀏覽萊曼(Lyman)的歷史圖表,便見其中所列、佔據羅馬帝國原有疆土並從其而出的王國或主權體如下:汪達爾人、阿蘭人、蘇維匯人、赫魯利人、法蘭克人、西哥特人、東哥特人、勃艮第人、倫巴底人、不列顛人。羅馬帝國本身已不復存在,權勢分散為大量相對細小的主權體——由這時期獸頭上的十角恰當地代表。連羅馬天主教徒自己也承認,羅馬帝國因北方民族的入侵而被分裂為十國(加爾默論 Revelation 13:1;他還引了貝倫高、博敘埃、杜潘。見牛頓,頁209);而馬基雅維利(《佛羅倫薩史》(Hist. of Flor.) 卷一)——無意為這預言提供例證,大概也根本未想起它——列出了這些名字:

  1. 摩西亞的東哥特人;
  2. 潘諾尼亞的西哥特人;
  3. 加斯科涅和西班牙的蘇維匯人與阿蘭人;
  4. 阿非利加的汪達爾人;
  5. 法蘭西的法蘭克人;
  6. 勃艮第的勃艮第人;
  7. 意大利的赫魯利人和圖林根人;
  8. 不列顛的薩克森人和盎格魯人;
  9. 匈牙利的匈奴;
  10. 起初在多瑙河、後在意大利的倫巴底人。

牛頓爵士提出的編排如下:

  1. 西班牙和阿非利加的汪達爾人與阿蘭人之國;
  2. 西班牙的蘇維匯人之國;
  3. 西哥特人之國;
  4. 高盧的阿蘭人之國;
  5. 勃艮第人之國;
  6. 法蘭克人之國;
  7. 不列顛人之國;
  8. 匈奴之國;
  9. 倫巴底人之國;
  10. 拉文納之國。

另比較達菲爾德,《論預言》(Duffield on the Prophecies),頁279、280。至於組成十這數目、涵蓋古代羅馬權勢的其他編排,見牛頓,《論預言》,頁209、210。米德先生、勞埃德主教和牛頓爵士所提的編排略有出入;但令人注意的仍是:能以如此好的把握湊出這個數目,尤其它竟由一位羅馬天主教徒自己提示出來。即使無法絕對精確地湊出這數目,或所有作家對組成這十個的王朝並不一致,我們也當記得:這些權勢是在極度混亂中興起的;一國興起、一國傾覆,快速相繼;其位置與疆界,不像古老而穩固的邦國那樣確定。有一件事是確定的:歷史上再沒有一個事例,是一個擁有巨大權勢的帝國分裂為許多小主權體,而這描述比諸王朝在龐大羅馬權勢瓦解中的興起更適用於它;另一件同樣確定的事是:若我們如今要為強大的羅馬權勢——它的征服、它統治的版圖、以及教皇權興起前後那帝國的狀況——尋找一個恰當的表號,我們決找不到比那可怕的第四獸——鐵牙銅爪、把地踐踏在腳下、頭上長出十角——更貼切恰當的表號。

(3) 在這些角中間長出了一個具有非凡特性的小角。如今的問題是:若它不代表安提阿古,它是否在教皇權中找到恰當的應驗。關乎這探究,對教皇權的歷史與主張有最起碼的認識,便可知這表號有驚人的貼切性——如此貼切,以致我們如今若想找一個代表它的表號,決找不到比但以理所用的更合適的。

(a) 小角將在其他的角中間長出來,並立於其間——與它們分掌權柄,或分享、運用那權柄。即,假定它指教皇權,教皇的權勢將從羅馬帝國中長出;將是那一大權勢所分成的諸主權體之一,與其他十個權勢分享統治權。它將是加於十者之上的第十一個權勢。誰能不知道,教皇權起初、當它首次主張屬世權柄時,對那瓦解分裂的羅馬帝國所持的,正是這樣的關係?它正是那一大主權所分成的權勢之一。

(b) 它不與它們同時長出,而是當它們已經存在之時,在其中間興起。在異象中,它們被看見實際一同存在,而這新權勢在他們中間拔地而起。還有甚麼比這更貼切地描述教皇權——一個在偉大羅馬權柄碎裂、分散為大量主權體之時興起的權勢?那時這新權勢被看見升起——起初微小,漸漸增強,直到其實力超過它們任何一個,並取得它們中間無一取得過的世界地位。這描述是準確的。它不是一個入侵他們的外來權勢;它在他們中間拔起——出於同一獸的頭,構成那統治世界的同一大權勢的一部分。

(c) 它起初微小,但不久便強大到能拔出並取代其他三角。還有比這更恰當的表號來描述教皇權嗎?我們如今還能找到更恰當的嗎?任何人對教皇權歷史有最起碼的認識,都知道它起初微小,它對世界的優勢乃是緩慢而穩定增長的結果。的確,它起初如此微弱,其最初的面貌與形態如此不明確,以致歷史上最困難的事情之一,便是確切知道它究竟是何時開始的,或確定它作為一個獨特權勢起源的確切日期。不同的預言解釋體系,全系於此。我們看到那權勢後來特性鮮明、對世界發揮巨大的影響——使萬國臣服於它的控制;我們看到長期運作的各種原因傾向於此,並能追蹤它們在產生此事上逐漸的運行;但它統治權究竟始於哪個確切時期、教皇權作為這樣的權勢其第一個特徵性的行動是甚麼、它作為一個融合獨特屬世與屬教會權柄的奇特權勢,其確切的起點何在——無人能絕對確定地斷定。誰能定出確切的日期?誰能說出那究竟是甚麼時候?誠然,在教皇權的早期歷史中,有若干分立的行動、或屬世權柄的行使,但這權勢的確切起點,無人能確定到毫無懷疑餘地的地步。任何人都可以看出,這樣一個權勢的開端,用一個在別的角中間長出的小角來標示,是何等恰當。

(d) 它將變為強大,因為這「小角」如此壯大,以至於拔出獸的三個角。教皇權勢力的增長,凡對歷史略有認識的人無不知曉。它使萬國臣服,並主張和行使隨意廢立君王、分派王冠的權利。

(e) 它將制伏「三王」;即十角所代表的十王中的三個。先知在它進程中的某一點看見三角在它面前傾倒,或被它推翻。在它的歷史中,或許還有別的時刻,可以被看為它已傾覆更多——也許全部十個——但引起注意的,是它興起之後不久,十個之中有三個被看見在它面前倒下。關乎這一點的應用,可以這樣說:

(1) 如上所述,它不適用於安提阿古·伊皮法尼——無論從哪個意義上,他都沒有推翻繼亞歷山大之後的三個佔據王位的君主,更不必說這些乃是同時並存的王或國了。

(2) 歷史上再沒有別的時期、也沒有別的事件,可以應用於此——除了安提阿古或教皇權之外。

(3) 在羅馬帝國瓦解時的混亂、以及教皇權興起時那些事件記載的不完全之中,若難以找到確切記載、在各方面都準確而絕對應驗異象的事件,並不足為奇。

(4) 然而,在教皇權的歷史中,是能以相當好的把握把這應驗找出來的。若它適用於教皇權,所要求的似乎是:十國或主權體中的三個,將被那權勢連根拔起;它們將不再作為分立的主權體存在;它們將被歸入那興起的權勢;作為分立的國,它們將不再在世界歷史中扮演角色。米德先生認為,這樣被移植或連根拔起的三個主權體,是希臘人、倫巴底人和法蘭克人。牛頓爵士認為是拉文納總督區、倫巴底人、以及羅馬的元老院和公爵領。對這些假設的反對意見,見牛頓,《論預言》,頁216、217。他認為當指的王國如下:

第一,拉文納總督區。這按權利屬於希臘諸帝,是他們在意大利領地的首府。它在教皇的慫恿下叛離,被倫巴底王阿斯托爾福斯奪取——後者想使自己成為意大利之主。教皇在急難中向法蘭西王丕平求援;丕平進軍意大利,在帕維亞圍困倫巴底人,強使他們交出總督區及意大利境內其他領土。這些領土並未按公義歸還希臘皇帝,而是應教皇的懇求,賜給彼得和他的繼承者,作為永遠的產業。「這樣,」普拉蒂納說,「總督區之名——從納爾西斯時代延續到拉文納陷落,共一百七十年——便消滅了。」——《教皇列傳》(Lives of the Popes)。照西戈尼烏斯的說法,這事成就在主後755年。見吉本,《衰亡史》(Dec. and Fall),卷二頁224;卷三頁332、334、338。牛頓主教說,從此時期起,教皇既成為屬世的君王,便不再以皇帝在位的年份、而以自己登上教皇寶座的年份,為他們的書信和諭旨紀年。

第二,倫巴底王國。這王國使教皇們不勝其擾。在亞德良一世任教皇時,教皇的領地被德西德里烏斯侵犯。他們再次向法蘭西王求援,丕平之子及繼承者查理曼進攻倫巴底人;他既想擴大自己的版圖,便征服了倫巴底人,終結了他們的王國,把他們領地的大部分賜給教皇。這是倫巴底王國的終局——在它取得意大利領地之後第206年,即主後774年。見吉本,《衰亡史》,卷三頁335。

第三,在屬世意義上歸順教皇的羅馬諸邦。羅馬人雖在屬靈上順服教皇,但很長一段時間由元老院治理,保留了許多古老的特權,並選舉西方的皇帝和教皇。然而眾所周知,這權柄後來轉入教皇之手,並被他們保留至今,教皇一直是屬世兼屬教會的元首。見牛頓主教,頁319、320。古代羅馬自由的一切表象都消失了,這羅馬統治權本身不復存在,被教皇權完全吸收。薩克森人、法蘭克人等繼續保持他們作為屬世權勢的獨立;這些邦國則完全歸入教皇的統治,作為獨立的王國或主權體不復存在。這便是牛頓主教對那將被拔出之「三角」的解釋。在那一部分歷史的混亂與不確定中,這類事情本不能指望有絕對的確定性,也不能合理地苛求。

若有三個這樣的權勢,植根於後來臣服教皇權的地區,或消失、或被吸收於構成教皇統治權之獨特性的那一統治權中,或併入羅馬教皇國——被視為地上萬國中一個自立的主權——這便滿足了一切的要求。菲伯先生認為這三者是:赫魯利—圖林根、東哥特、倫巴底;他論到它們說:它們「必然在教皇權的近旁被根除——按地理而言,它們正立於教皇權的面前——而那名為彼得產業的屬世公國,便是從它們被征服的廣大領地中切割出來的」。——《聖曆》(Sacred Calendar),卷二頁102。高森教授(《論教皇制》(Discourse on Popery):日內瓦,1844)認為此處所指的三王或三國,是赫魯利人、東哥特人和倫巴底人。照鮑爾(《教皇列傳》,卷二頁108,科克斯博士版,注)的說法,丕平賜給教皇、或教皇因法蘭西諸王的介入而據有的屬世領地如下:

(1) 拉文納總督區。照西戈尼烏斯的說法,它包括以下城邑:拉文納、博洛尼亞、伊莫拉、菲恩扎、福林波波利、弗利、切塞納、博比奧、費拉拉、科馬基奧、阿德里亞、塞爾維亞、塞基亞;

(2) 五城區,包括里米尼、佩薩羅、科尼亞、法諾、西尼加利亞、安科納、奧西莫、烏馬諾、耶西、福索姆布羅內、蒙特費雷特羅、烏爾比諾、卡利、盧科利、尤古比奧;

(3) 羅馬城及其公爵領,轄有數座名城;這些城自教皇格列高利二世以來,便脫離對皇帝的一切臣服,歸順了彼得。另見鮑爾,卷二頁134,他說:「教皇由查理曼之手,得着了總督區、五城區和斯波萊托公爵領」(包括羅馬城及其公爵領)。在同頁他又說(注):「教皇擁有總督區、五城區、斯波萊托公爵領,以及羅馬城及其公爵領。」當記住,這些陳述是史家們絲毫不顧這預言的任何可能應驗、對它隻字不提,而純粹作為尋常歷史進程中發生的簡單史實而作出的。要證明這「小角」的描述適用於教皇權,所要確立的實質事實是:在正式意義上的教皇權開始之時——即照我的看法,屬靈與屬世權柄的聯合,或羅馬主教(此前只被視為純屬靈或純教會的統治者)對屬世權柄的取得——有一個三重的管轄權被主張或被承認,一個三重的統治;或先前為三個主權體的,如今在他之下合一,它們分立的政權消融於教皇這單一的主權中。而正當此時、正當教皇權之初、或當它增長到可以被認出在世界屬世主權中佔有一席之地時,確實存在這樣一個聯合的統治權、這樣三個分立權勢在一人之下的聯合——這從吉本先生的一段摘錄可以明白。他正論到加洛林王族因教皇把法蘭西王冠賜給宮相丕平——使他勝過克洛維的後裔希爾德里克——所施的恩惠,而賜給教皇的報償。關乎這事,吉本先生總體上評論說(卷三頁336):「教皇們與加洛林家族彼此的義務,構成古代與近代、屬世與教會歷史之間的重要環節。」然後他進而:(1)列舉教皇們賜給加洛林王族的禮物或恩惠;(2)丕平和查理曼回賜教皇們的恩惠。關乎後者,他作了如下陳述(卷三頁338):「加洛林家族的感恩與這些義務相稱,他們的名被奉為羅馬教會的拯救者和恩人。她那由田莊房舍組成的古老產業,因他們的慷慨變為城邑和行省的屬世統治權;總督區的贈予,是丕平征服的初熟果子。阿斯托爾福斯(倫巴底王)歎息着放棄了他的獵物;諸要城的鑰匙和人質被交給法蘭西大使;他以他主人的名,把它們呈獻在彼得墓前。總督區的廣闊範圍,可以包括意大利所有曾聽命於皇帝或其副手的行省;但其嚴格而固有的疆界,包括在拉文納、博洛尼亞和費拉拉的領地之內;其不可分的附屬地是五城區,它沿亞得里亞海從里米尼伸至安科納,並向內陸推進,遠達亞平寧山脊。在這宗交易中,教皇們的野心和貪婪受到了嚴厲的譴責。

「一個基督教祭司的謙卑,或許本該拒絕一個屬世的王國——他若不撇下其職分的德行,便不易治理;一個忠順的臣民、甚至一個慷慨的仇敵,或許本不會那樣急於分贓野蠻人的擄物;若皇帝曾託付司提反以他的名義求還總督區,我不會免除教皇背信與虛謊的責難。但按法律的嚴格解釋,人可以不加追問地接受他的恩主所賜、而施者並無不義的任何東西。希臘皇帝已經放棄或喪失了他對總督區的權利;阿斯托爾福斯的劍,被加洛林家族更強的劍折斷了。丕平不是為了聖像破壞者的緣故,才兩次率領他本人和軍隊越過阿爾卑斯山;他擁有、也可以合法地讓渡他的征服;對希臘人的糾纏,他敬虔地回答說,任何屬人的考慮,都不能誘使他收回他為罪得赦免、為他靈魂得救而賜給羅馬教皇的禮物。

「這項輝煌的贈予,是在至高而絕對的統治權中賜下的;世界頭一次看見一個基督教主教,擁有屬世君王的特權——法官的選任、審判的行使、賦稅的徵收,以及拉文納宮殿的財富。在倫巴底王國的解體中,斯波萊托公國的居民為躲避風暴尋求庇護,按拉文納的式樣剃了頭,宣告自己是彼得的僕人和臣民,並藉這自願的歸順,完成了教會國現今的版圖。」從這段摘錄可清楚看出以下幾點:

(a) 照吉本先生的說法,這裏是教皇屬世權柄的開端。

(b) 照上述的觀點,這正是教皇權作為一個獨特而奇特之統治權的開始。

(c) 這裏面有一個三重的政權,或三個聯合於他之下的屬世主權,按吉本先生的話,當時構成了「教會國現今的版圖」。第一是拉文納總督區;第二是五城區——他說,那是總督區「不可分的附屬地」;第三是「斯波萊托公國」——他說,它「完成了教會國現今的版圖」。吉本先生接着說,這後來大大「擴展」了;但教皇權首次以這個形態出現於歐洲的屬世主權之中。誠然,我沒有發現,倫巴底王國如通常所說的那樣,在歸順教皇權柄的屬世主權之列;但我確實發現,有三個分立的屬世主權失去了它們的獨立存在,聯合於那一個屬世權柄之下——並藉屬靈與屬世權柄的聯合,構成那一個獨特的國。在倫巴底,權柄仍握在倫巴底諸王自己手中,直到那國被丕平和查理曼的武力制伏,此後它便歸於法蘭西王冠之下,雖然有一段時間仍在其本國君王的名義統治之下。見吉本,卷三頁334、335、338。若有人說,在解釋這段關乎被拔出之「三角」或被滅三國的經文時,應當在那一大國所分成的十國之中尋找它們,而上述三者——拉文納總督區、五城區、斯波萊托及羅馬公爵領——照上面的名單並不恰好在十之數,回答這一點只需注意本案的兩個主要事實:(1) 羅馬那一大權勢,事實上分裂為大量在其廢墟上興起的主權體——通常、但事實上並不確切地,以十來代表;(2) 教皇權以對上述三個領地公認的統治權開始其進程——這三地事實上是構成羅馬權勢的那一大統治權的一部分,且在同一疆域之內。一個值得注意的事實是:教皇們至今頭戴三重冠——這是別的君王所沒有的——彷彿他們已在自己之下吸收了三個分立而各別的主權體;又彷彿他們代表三種分立的統治形態。本段闡述所論的總和,可以這樣表述:

(1) 原本有一個由「第四獸」所代表的偉大主權——羅馬帝國。

(2) 事實上,正如歷史所充份證實的,這一個偉大而統一的權勢,分裂為大量分立而獨立的主權體——最自然、最明顯地由十來描述,或在預言異象中看來恰如十的數目;事實上,一些對這預言的應驗毫無興趣、對「十角」可能象徵之物全無刻意指涉的史家,也正是如此記述的。

(3) 有一個別樣而獨特的權勢,從它們中間長出,並長得極其強大——一個與其他諸權不同、與世上從前出現過的任何東西都不同的權勢——兼具任何別的主權體都找不到的特質——同時與那一個原本的主權、並與它所分成的十個,有獨特的關係——在一個重要意義上,是那一個權勢的延長,又以獨特的方式在其他諸權中間興起——那獨特的屬教會兼屬世的權勢——教皇權——由「小角」恰當地代表。

(4) 事實上,這一個權勢把三個主權體吸入自己裏面——使它們作為獨立權勢歸於無有,把它們合成一個極其獨特的統治權——恰當地由「把它們拔出」來代表。

(5) 作為這樣一個統治權的恰當表號或象徵,至今仍戴着一頂冠冕,最自然、最明顯地提示這樣一種三重的統治吸收。

(6) 這一切都確實由先知所用的表號所預表;或者說,這些表號正是在假定這些事件被定意指涉時,自然會被採用的。

(7) 再沒有別的歷史事件,能讓這些非凡的表號自然而明顯地應用於其上。這些事若果然如此,除了假定但以理受了默示,還能怎樣解釋?人可有甚麼天然的敏識,能想出這些代表未來的表號?

(d) 它必狂妄驕傲——「向至高者說誇大的話」。沒有一個新教徒會懷疑這在教皇權身上是真實的;沒有一個認識歷史的人敢對此提出質疑。教皇權狂妄的主張,顯明在那權勢的全部歷史中;按公正的解釋,它的僭越事實上乃是「向神說誇大的話」,這一點無人能懷疑。教皇曾經主張、或容讓人把只能屬於神的名號與特權加在他身上。見 2 Thessalonians 2:4 的註釋中對此的充份論證。假定此處指教皇權,那裏所提的事實,便是解釋本段所需的一切。另比較《字義派》(the Literalist),卷一頁24-27。

(e) 它必是一個逼迫人的權勢——「與聖民爭戰」、「折磨至高者的聖民」。誰能懷疑這在教皇權身上是真實的?宗教裁判所;對瓦勒度派的種種逼迫;阿爾瓦公爵的蹂躪;史密斯菲爾德的火刑;果阿的酷刑——的確,教皇權的全部歷史,都可以引來證明這話適用於那權勢。若真有甚麼能「磨滅至高者的聖民」——能把他們從地上剪除,使福音派信仰歸於滅絕——那就是教皇權的逼迫了。主後1208年,教皇英諾森三世向瓦勒度派和阿爾比根斯派頒佈十字軍,其間百萬人喪生。自耶穌會修會於1540年創立至1580年,九十萬人被毀滅。三十年間,十五萬人死於宗教裁判所。在低地國家,自立查理五世反新教徒詔令、至1559年沙托坎布雷齊和約的三十八年間,五萬人因異端之罪被絞死、斬首、焚燒或活埋。在阿爾瓦公爵執政的五年半之內,一萬八千人死於劊子手之手。的確,只要對教皇權歷史有最起碼的認識,便會使任何人確信,此處論「與聖民爭戰」(Daniel 7:21)、「折磨至高者的聖民」(Daniel 7:25)的話,嚴格適用於那權勢,並準確描述它的歷史。誠然,也有別的逼迫人的權勢,但沒有一個,這話對它如此適用;沒有一個,能如此自然地由這話提示出來。為證明這一點,只需引述教皇權的歷史、以及它為剷除信仰不同者所作的一切。讓任何人回想:(1) 對瓦勒度派的逼迫;(2) 阿爾瓦公爵在低地國家的作為;(3) 馬利女王在英格蘭的逼迫;(4) 宗教裁判所;(5) 在路德和加爾文的時代,撲滅意大利和西班牙一切改革努力的企圖——且相當成功(見麥克里);以及 (6) 在德意志和瑞士鎮壓宗教改革的企圖——這一切或由教皇權直接發起、或經它認可,且都為着同一目的——他便看不出有何理由懷疑,這裏的話嚴格適用於那權勢,而且地上再沒有一個政權,能如此自然地由這話提示出來。——康寧安,載《字義派》,卷一頁27、28。的確,單單死於宗教裁判所的,誰能數算得盡呢?

(h) 它必主張立法之權——「必想改變節期和律法」。此處的迦勒底原文,照格塞尼烏斯和德韋特的譯法,可譯作定期——設定的時期、節令。格塞尼烏斯(《字典》)說,此處的字「論及聖潔的時節、節期」;而它在此處指宗教制度,是無可懷疑的。其意義是:他將主張對這類制度或節期的管制權,並隨己意設立或更改它們。他將廢除或修改現有的這類制度,或按自己看為好的,設立新的。這樣,這話便適用於某一主張有權規定宗教制度、並更改神之律法的權勢。在教皇權的主張中——設立對節期與齋戒日的管轄;要求列國的法律受塑造以支撐它的主張;並修改神在聖經中啟示的律法——誰也無法看不見這話的應驗。教皇曾主張作教會的元首,並曾主張和行使設立聖潔節期的權利;廢除古的制度;引進無數新的節日,實際上在諸多事上廢除了神的律法。我們只需引證以下各點為例:(a) 無誤性的主張——藉此主張了一種涵蓋一切領域的絕對管轄權;(b) 一切關乎敬拜偶像的法律——如此直接地違背神的律法;(c) 聖職人員的獨身律——使天上一條關乎婚姻的律法歸於無效;(d) 整個關乎煉獄的教義;(e) 變質說的教義;(f) 藉設立無數同樣神聖的聖徒節期,實際上廢除了基督徒的安息日;(g) 保留杯不給平信徒的規條——違背救主的命令;(h) 以及總括而言,教皇權對整個宗教課題所主張的絕對管制。的確,再沒有甚麼比說它主張「改變節期和律法」的權利,更能標示這權勢的特性了。這一切之外,還當加上另一個特性 (Daniel 7:8),即「它有人的眼」;換言之,以遠見的敏識著稱。這話還能更恰當地應用於別的甚麼嗎——羅馬宮廷深沉、狡詐而深謀遠慮的外交;耶穌會士的敏識;那使世界臣服於自己的巧妙政策?

這些例證,在我看來,必使人毫不懷疑:此處所論的一切,將在教皇權中找到充份的應驗,而它必須被視為指涉那權勢。若然如此,剩下的是

三、按這解釋探究我們還可期待甚麼,或這段經文對尚屬未來的事投下甚麼亮光。這權勢的起源、增長、一般特性與影響,直到遙遠的某一時期,都已由這解釋闡明。剩下的是:從我們面前的這段經文,探究這還要持續多久,以及關乎它的傾覆,我們當預期甚麼。那麼,在假定此處指教皇權的前提下,以下幾點似乎是清楚的:

它將從其設立之日起,持續一段確定的時期 (Daniel 7:25)。這持續期被稱為「一載、二載、半載」——三年半——一千二百六十日——一千二百六十年。見該節的註釋。這方面唯一的難處(若那解釋正確),在於確定教皇權實際開始的時間——即起算點;而新教徒中種種解釋的分歧,皆由此而起。只要假定任何一個時期為教皇權興起之日、作為計算的起點,便容易從那日期推算,並定出它所指的某個終結點——即終算點——可以視之為那權勢傾覆之時。但歷史上再沒有比確定教皇權正式開始的確切時間更困難的事了:即那被公平地理解為教皇制的特殊統治,究竟於何時開始於世;或它最初可辨別的行動是甚麼。歷史沒有把那時期標記得毫無疑問;它沒有為它附上確定的日期;直到今日,仍不容易確定那權勢何時開始,或指認某一時期的某一事件,必定標誌着它。它似乎是一個漸進的增長,它的開始沒有被如此明確地標示,使我們能絕對確定地證明一千二百六十年延伸到哪個時候。

不同作家為教皇權的興起指定了不同的時期,也指定不同的行動為那權勢的第一個行動;而關乎它終結的一切預言,都取決於哪個時期被定為它興起之時。正是這一點,引出了那麼多出於推測的東西,成了那麼多失望的因由,也使如今一切關乎那權勢終結的計算,蒙上這麼多晦暗。聖經再沒有比這更清楚的了:那權勢必被毀滅;而我們若能確切查明它起源的日期,在關乎其終結的事上,便幾乎沒有犯錯的危險。被定為它興起之日的時期,主要有以下幾個:

(1) 查士丁尼頒布的一道教令(主後533年),以及他同時寫給教皇的一封信,信中承認教皇為眾教會之首,從而把一個只能屬於救主的尊號賜給他,並使他本人和帝國置於羅馬主教的主權之下。——達菲爾德,《論預言》,頁281。

(2) 皇帝福卡斯的諭令(主後606年),確認了查士丁尼所作的,並認可了他所頒布的法典;那法典以公認的教皇至上權為根基,數世紀間成為歐洲立法的基礎;這諭令又把「普世主教」的尊號賜給他。

(3) 教皇司提反的行動:當法蘭西王位的覬覦者向他求助時,他確認了丕平的王位,廢黜了希爾德里克三世,並作為回報,從丕平手中接受拉文納總督區和五城區。見蘭克,《教皇史》(Ranke's Hist. of the Papacy),卷一頁23。這事約發生於主後752年。

(4) 吉本先生的意見(4:363),認為格列高利七世才是教皇權真正的奠基者。「格列高利七世,」他說,「無論被人崇拜為教皇君主制的奠基者,還是被人憎惡,都被逐出羅馬,死於薩萊諾的流亡之中。」格列高利於主後1073年成為教皇。這些不同的日期,若被採為教皇權的根基,各加上一千二百六十年的時期,便分別得出1793、1866、2012和2333年,作為教皇統治終結的時期。由於這是解釋眾預言的一個極要緊的問題,把這些意見稍加詳細地考察一下,或屬合宜。但為此,必須對教皇權作為一個獨特統治權究竟是甚麼——即它在聖經作者眼中、並如它在世上實際存在和存在過的那樣,其獨特性何在——有清楚的概念;而關乎這一點,意見分歧不大。

它不僅是教會的權勢——不僅是屬靈的統治——不僅是一個主教之於一間教會或一個教區的那種管制——也不是純粹的屬世統治,而顯然是二者的聯合:那是羅馬主教憑其作為教會元首的首位權所主張的奇特統治,加上一種屬世的權柄——起初只及於有限的轄區,但最終、並作為自然的結果,及於其他一切主權體,並主張普世的統治。我們不會在羅馬第一主教的純屬靈統治中,也不會在那純屬靈——無論其範圍多大——的統治中,清楚看見教皇權或教皇統治權本身;而要在二者的接合處去找:那時,憑着一種假裝的神聖權利,一種屬世統治長了出來,最終擴展於全歐洲,主張分賜王冠的權柄;使王國陷於禁罰之下;並解除臣民的效忠義務。我們若能找到這主張的開端——這種奇特統治的胚種——便無疑找到了教皇權的開端——先知眼中的起算點——我們在判定其存續期間題時,當由此起算的起點。

那麼,既持這樣的教皇權觀,合宜的是探究它何時開始,或上述各時期中——若有任何一個——哪個可以被公正地視為其開端。

一、查士丁尼的教令,以及他承認羅馬主教為教會之首的那封信,主後533年。這事發生於約翰二世——被算為羅馬第五十五任主教——在位時。查士丁尼向教皇提出這一申請、並賜予他這尊榮的性質是:教會中發生了一場爭論,問題是「三位一體中的一位是否在肉身中受苦」;君士坦丁堡的修士們惟恐在查士丁尼一道判定其為異端的教令下被定罪,便提請教皇裁決這一點。查士丁尼對這類探究極感興趣,且在這題目上持相反意見,也向教皇提出上訴。於是他擬了一份冗長的信經,把爭論的條款包括在內,派兩位主教攜往羅馬,把整件事呈在教皇面前。同時他寫信給教皇,祝賀他當選,向他保證他所送去之信仰告解中的信仰,乃是整個東方教會的信仰,並懇請他在回信中宣告:他接納一切承認這信仰的人進入相交,而不接納任何不承認的人。為加重這信的分量,他隨信向彼得獻上禮物,包括數隻金聖杯和其他鑲有寶石的金器皿。有人根據皇帝對教皇的這種尊重、以及把一項待決的重大問題提交給他這位全教會之首的事實,論證這才是教皇權正式的開端,一千二百六十年當由此算起。但反對這意見的理由是無法逾越的,因為:

(a) 這裏完全沒有構成教皇權本質的東西——屬世與屬靈權柄的獨特聯合;或那權勢後來對世界所施加的特殊統治。所發生的一切,不過是一位皇帝對一個主張自己是教會屬靈元首的人所表示的尊重——而那人主張這首位權,早在許多年之前。沒有任何改變——沒有正式意義上的開端——沒有教皇權那樣對人類的新統治形態的起始。

(b) 而且事實上,這件事裏對教皇的真正尊重,終歸甚少。「對那非常的尊重(把這問題呈交教皇一事所顯的尊重),」鮑爾說,「幾乎不應被看重。查士丁尼對教皇大表尊重,也對所有其他主教如此——只要他們同意他;但當他們不同意時,便毫不尊重——他認為自己至少與他們中最好的那位一樣有資格——他也確實如此——裁決關乎信仰的爭議;我們不久便會看到他與教皇陛下本人兵戎相見。」——《教皇列傳》,i. 336。

二、被定為教皇權起源的第二個日期,是皇帝福卡斯所下的諭令(主後606年);據說他藉此延續了查士丁尼所作的讓予。這行動如下:波尼法斯三世既被立為羅馬主教,倚恃福卡斯對他的恩寵和偏愛,勸使他撤銷了把「普世主教」尊號定於君士坦丁堡主教的教令,並取得了另一道把這尊號定於他和他的繼承者的教令。福卡斯頒賜這尊號的諭令,確實沒有流傳下來;但史家的共同見證是,這尊號曾被賜予。見莫斯海姆,i. 513;鮑爾,i. 426。這裏所斷言的事實有人懷疑,莫斯海姆認為它依據的是巴羅尼烏斯的權威。「然而,」他說,「可以肯定,確有這類事發生。」但把它視為教皇權本身的正式開端,有嚴重的反對理由。因為 (a) 這不是教皇所主張並維持的那種特殊統治或權力形態的開始。即使這尊號曾被賜予,它也沒有加添任何新的權柄;它沒有改變這統治的性質;事實上,它沒有使羅馬主教與從前有所不同。他在各方面仍服於諸皇帝的屬世權柄之下,除他在教會中所行使的以外,別無管制之權。(b) 而連這一點點,也被賜予它的同一權威——君士坦丁堡皇帝的權威——撤回了;儘管此後教皇自己一直主張並堅持這尊號。見鮑爾,i. 427。誠然,由於這尊號被賜給教皇們,他們開始攫取權柄、覬覦屬世的統治;但仍沒有因這尊號的主張而產生對這種權柄正式的攫取,也沒有以這尊號為直接結果而設立任何這樣的屬世統治。因此,這行動不夠突出、明確而決定,不足以構成世界歷史上的一個紀元或時代的開端;教皇權的興起,不能恰當地由此起算。這無疑是那特殊權勢崛起至其偉大的腳步之一,或對後來其主張、狂妄與驕傲的根基有所貢獻;但它是否是表徵教皇權、足以被視為其起源或起算點的重大事件,是可疑的。

然而,正是着眼於此、並把這視為教皇權正式的起源,羅伯特·弗萊明牧師在他論教皇權興衰的著作(初版於1701年)中,基於他關乎那權勢持續期的計算,說出了下面這段值得注意的話:「我們若假定敵基督在606年開始他的統治,他持續的一千二百六十年——無論是儒略年還是平常年——便延伸到1866年,作為那七頭怪獸的末期限。但既然那只是預言年(每年360日),我們必須除去十八年,才能得出神之靈在本書中所設計的確切時間量。這樣,教皇僭奪的最終期限(假定他確於606年興起)必終於1848年。」——(科賓版,頁32)。無論這被視為僅僅一次僥倖的猜中——千萬次失敗中的一次成功——還是被視為對未來正確計算的結果,任何人把它與1848年的事件——教皇被逐出羅馬、一個民選政府在教皇權的本座建立起來——相比較,都不能不看到,這話出於一個半世紀之前,實屬驚人。它是否是正確的計算,教皇政府的那次暫時傾覆,是否應被視為將以其毀滅告終的一連串事件中的第一件,時間必作出判定。然而,基於上述的理由,以及那些支持另一個不同開端日期的理由,目前更可能的是,其終結當屬於另一個時期。

三、被定為教皇權開始的第三個日期,是上述丕平的讓予,主後752年。丕平所作的這讓予,又經查理曼及其繼承者確認;毫無疑問,正是在這個時期,教皇權開始在歐洲諸主權體中取得其地位。贊成這意見——即這才是教皇權正式的興起、預言的起算點——的論據,有以下各項:

(a) 我們在此有一個確定的行動——一個顯而易見的行動,標誌着這對人類統治的進程。

(b) 我們在此有的,確實是屬世統治的開端,或那權柄在屬世主權行動中的首次公認的行使——頒布法律、主張統治、揮動屬世的權杖、戴上屬世的冠冕。此前的行動都屬屬靈性質,對羅馬主教的一切尊重也都屬屬靈性質。從此以後,他被承認為屬世的君王,並以這身份立於歐洲戴冠的元首之中。

(c) 這確實是教皇對歐洲所施展的那巨大統治的開端——起初雖然微小,最終卻變得如此強大、如此狂妄,以至主張對地上一切王國的管轄權,以及解除臣民效忠的權利、使王國陷於禁罰、分賜王冠、指定君王的繼承、向萬民課稅、並處分一切新發現之地的權利。

(d) 這比世上發生的任何其他單一事件,都更符合眾預言——尤其是但以理的預言,即小角的長出、以及那小角從第四國所分成的十角中拔出三個的事實。

(e) 還當補充,這與眾預言始終持有的觀念相符:這將是第四帝國的正式延長。第五帝國或王國,將是聖徒的統治、或地上公義的統治;第四帝國在其影響力和權勢上,一直延伸到那時。事實上,這羅馬權勢正是這樣集中在教皇權之中。形態改變了,但先知眼中的,乃是羅馬的權勢;它在其各個階段——異教的和名義上基督教的——之下被如此考量,直到聖徒的統治開始、或神的國設立為止。而這改變、這種屬世性質的統治之定居於教皇權、以及教皇被承認為擁有這屬世權柄,正是在司提反的時代、並藉着丕平和查理曼的行動而發生的。這確實在希爾德布蘭——即格列高利七世——手中得以完成(吉本,卷三頁353;卷四頁363),但這巨大的權勢,正式起源於丕平的時代。

四、被定為教皇權起源的第四個日期,是希爾德布蘭——即格列高利七世——的時代。這是吉本先生所定的時期。關乎此人,他評述說(卷四頁363):「格列高利七世,無論被人崇拜為教皇君主制的奠基者,還是被人憎惡,都被逐出羅馬,死於薩萊諾的流亡之中。」他又(卷三頁353)論到格列高利說:「經過長期的一連串醜聞之後,使徒的座位因格列高利七世的嚴厲與熱忱得了改革和抬升。那位野心勃勃的修士畢生致力於兩項計劃的執行:一、把選舉的自由與獨立固定於樞機團,永遠廢除皇帝和羅馬人民的權利或僭奪;二、把西方帝國作為教會的封邑或恩賜來授予和收回,並把他的屬世統治擴展到地上的君王和王國。經過五十年的抗爭,第一項設計在教士階層的堅定支持下得以成就,他們的自由與首席的自由相連。但第二項企圖,儘管有表面而局部的成功,卻遭到屬世權勢的頑強抵抗,並最終被人類理性的進步所撲滅。」

然而,若上述的觀點正確;或我們看希爾德布蘭時代的教皇權,便必顯明,這不是那特殊統治的興起或起源,而只是長久以前所定、要在人類之上設立屬世統治之計劃的執行與完成。

還當補充:無論把上述前三個時期中的哪一個視為教皇權興起的時間,若我們在其中加上一千二百六十年的預言時期,我們如今便正處於預言之眼所注視的諸景象之中;作為預言的公正解釋者,我們不能不把這巨大的統治視為正速速趨於傾覆。那麼,照這主題最明顯的解釋,我們目前大概離那大權勢的終局和傾覆不遠;可預期在大約這個時期,將發生與其傾覆相連的事件。

它的權勢將被除去,如同藉着一場莊嚴的審判——寶座既已設立,神就要出來向這權勢宣判,傾覆它 (Daniel 7:10-11、Daniel 7:26)。這裏所指權勢的毀滅,將是絕對而完全的——彷彿「那獸被殺,身體扔在火中焚燒」——「他們必奪去他的權柄,除滅毀壞,一直到底」。這將標示這特殊權勢的絕對毀滅——它在世上的完全止息;即那構成其獨特性之物的絕對毀滅——第四國之獸那延長的權勢,集中並體現於小角所代表者之中。若應用於羅馬權勢或第四國,其意是:那在小角所代表者統治之下本會延長的權勢,將完全終止——彷彿獸的身體被焚燒了。

若應用於「小角」所代表的權勢——教皇權——其意是:那在其他諸權中間長出、變得如此強大、體現了獸如此多權勢的權勢,將作為一個屬教會兼屬世的權勢完全消逝。它將終止其統治,並作為地上的統治權勢之一消失。這將由某種非凡的神聖顯現所成就——彷彿神在大能威嚴中臨到審判、宣判判決;即那傾覆將是決定性的,並顯然是神干預的結果,彷彿神藉着一次正式的審判行動作成。在那權勢傾覆之時——無論何時——按這預言,自然可預期會有一些直接關乎它的動亂和革命的場景,彷彿神正對它宣判;一些曾承認其權柄的列國將發生重大變化,彷彿萬國的大審判者正出來主張他自己的權柄、他自己統治的權利,並照他所喜悅的處置地上的列國。

(C) 可預期那所指的權勢,將因其驕傲狂妄而被毀滅。見 Daniel 7:11 的註釋。即,在所指的時候,地上一切實際屬於第四獸或第四國的權勢,都將因「小角」所設立並堅持的主張而被除去:「我觀看,因這角說誇大話的聲音,我就觀看,直到那獸被殺……」(Daniel 7:11)。假定這指教皇權,所當預期的是:那權勢的驕傲與狂妄——即作為一個主張統治屬世之事、行使屬世權柄的教會權勢——將如此之大,以致羅馬的權勢——第四國那延長的權勢——被除去,它對世界的統治也將終止。那曾踐踏全地、壓碎並壓迫列國的巨大羅馬統治,仍將存留,如同獸延長的生命一般,直到因教皇權的狂妄和驕傲而全然被除去。人若不把這預言應用於具體的時事、而只判斷其含義,會說它將由這樣一些事件應驗:那延長的羅馬屬世權勢所及、教會的或教皇的權杖所轄的百姓,若因教皇權的驕傲狂妄而奮起,以力量起來要求自由——那實際上便是第四獸延長權勢的終結;這將是「因這角所說誇大的話」,並在一切方面應驗這預言的話。這權勢是否將有這樣的終結,時間必作出判定。

(D) 與這事件同時,作為其結果,我們可預期真理與公義如此傳播、聖徒如此在地上作王,以致恰由人子到亙古常在者面前得國所象徵 (Daniel 7:13-14)。正如在那些經文的解釋中指出的,這不一定暗示人子有任何看得見的顯現、或任何親身的作王(見該處的註釋),但將有那樣一次國度向人子和聖徒的交予,恰由這描述所象徵。即:將有巨大的變化;真理將迅速進展;福音將廣傳;世界的政府將發生改變,以致權柄轉入義人手中,他們將實際掌權。從那時起,「聖徒」將得着國度,世事將置於新的根基上。從那時期可以說,聖徒的統治將開始;即這方面將有如此的變化,以致構成世界歷史上的一個紀元——聖徒在地上作王的正式開端——那新的、最終的統治在世界中的設立。若真有這樣的變化——這樣顯著的進展——這樣傳播真理的便利——這樣傳播的新方法——以及隨之而來這樣確定的成功,一切攔阻退去,逼迫止息,足以在世界歷史上構成一個紀元或時代,並與世界歸向神相連——這便公平地滿足了這預言的解釋;這事一旦發生,凡能公平證明為這異象所含示的,便都成就了。

(E) 我們當期待地上有一個公義的統治。關乎我們憑這預言的話可公平期待甚麼,見 Daniel 7:14 的註釋。這預言授權我們期待一個時期:真宗教將普遍盛行;世界的權柄將握在好人——敬畏神的人——手中;神的律法將被遵守——被承認為管制人的律法;世界的屬世制度將充滿宗教、受其塑造;宗教的自由行使將不再有攔阻;而實際上地上掌權的,將是彌賽亞所設立的國。再沒有比這樣一個時期更確定的未來之事了,萬事都正趨向它。這樣一個時期,將應驗這非凡預言所公平含示的一切;信心和盼望當平靜而確信地期待它。愛神愛人的人,當為此勞苦、為此禱告;並因這時期必將來到的確定保證,我們在世上存在的一切道德黑暗中、在我們行善的一切挫折中,都當得着鼓舞。

英文原文

Hitherto is the end of the matter - That is, the end of what I saw and heard. This is the sum of what was disclosed to the prophet, but he still says that he meditated on it with profound interest, and that he had much solicitude in regard to these great events. The words rendered hitherto, mean, so far, or thus far. The phrase "end of the matter," means "the close of the saying a thing;" that is, this was all the revelation which was made to him, and he was left to his own meditations respecting it.

As for me Daniel - So far as I was concerned; or so far as this had any effect on me. It was not unnatural, at the close of this remarkable vision, to state the effect that it had on himself.

My cogitations much troubled me - My thoughts in regard to it. It was a subject which he could not avoid reflecting on, and which could not but produce deep solicitude in regard to the events which were to occur. Who could look into the future without anxious and agitating thought? These events were such as to engage the profoundest attention; such as to fix the mind in solemn thought. Compare the notes at Revelation 5:4.

And my countenance changed in me - The effect of these revelations depicted themselves on my countenance. The prophet does not say in what way - whether by making him pale, or careworn, or anxious, but merely that it produced a change in his appearance. The Chaldee is "brightness" - זיו zı̂yv - and the meaning would seem to be, that his bright and cheerful countenance was changed; that is, that his bright looks were changed; either by becoming pale (Gesenius, Lengerke), or by becoming serious and thoughtful.

But I kept the matter in my heart - I communicated to no one the cause of my deep and anxious thoughts. He hid the whole subject in his own mind, until he thought proper to make this record of what he had seen and heard. Perhaps there was no one to whom he could communicate the matter who would credit it; perhaps there was no one at court who would sympathize with him; perhaps he thought that it might savor of vanity if it were known; perhaps he felt that as no one could throw any new light on the subject, there would be no use in making it a subject of conversation; perhaps he felt so overpowered that he could not readily converse on it.

We are prepared now, having gone through with an exposition of this chapter, as to the meaning of the symbols, the words, and the phrases, to endeavor to ascertain what events are referred to in this remarkable prophecy, and to ask what events it was designed should be pourtrayed. And in reference to this there are but two opinions, or two classes of interpretations, that require notice: what refers it primarily and exclusively to Antiochus Epiphanes, and what refers it to the rise and character of the Papal power; what regards the fourth beast as referring to the empire of Alexander, and the little horn to Antiochus, and what regards the fourth beast as referring to the Roman empire, and the little horn to the Papal dominion. In inquiring which of these is the true interpretation, it will be proper, first, to consider whether it is applicable to Antiochus Epiphanes; secondly, whether it in fact finds a fulfillment in the Roman empire and the Papacy; and, thirdly, if such is the proper application, what are we to look for in the future in what remains unfulfilled in regard to the prophecy.

I. The question whether it is applicable to the case of Antiochus Epiphanes. A large class of interpreters, of the most respectable character, among whom are Lengerke, Maurer, Prof. Stuart (Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, p. 86, following; also Com. on Daniel, pp. 205-211), Eichhorn, Bertholdt, Bleek, and many others, suppose that the allusion to Antiochus is clear, and that the primary, if not the exclusive, reference to the prophecy is to him. Professor Stuart (Hints, p. 86) says, "The passage in Daniel 7:25 is so clear as to leave no reasonable room for doubt." "In Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:20, Daniel 7:24, the rise of Antiochus Epiphanes is described; for the fourth beast is, beyond all reasonable doubt, the divided Grecian dominion which succeeded the reign of Alexander the Great. From this dynasty springs Antiochus, Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:20, who is most graphically described in Daniel 7:25 'as one who shall speak great words against the most High,' etc."

The facts in regard to Antiochus, so far as they are necessary to be known in the inquiry, are briefly these: Antiochus Epiphanes (the Illustrios, a name taken on himself, Prideaux, iii. 213), was the son of Antiochus the Great, but succeeded his brother, Seleucus Philopator, who died 176 b.c. Antiochus reigned over Syria, the capital of which was Antioch, on the Oronres, from 176 b.c. to 164 b.c. His character, as that of a cruel tyrant, and a most bloodthirsty and bitter enemy of the Jews, is fully detailed in the first and second book of Maccabees. Compare also Prideaux, Con. vol. iii.-213-234. The facts in the case of Antiochus, so far as they are supposed to bear on the application of the prophecy before us, are thus stated by Prof. Stuart (Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, pp. 89, 90): "In the year 168 before Christ, in the month of May, Antiochus Epiphanes was on his way to attack Egypt, and he detached Apollonius, one of his military confidants, with 22,000 soldiers, in order to subdue and plunder Jerusalem. The mission was executed with entire success. A horrible slaughter was made of the men at Jerusalem, and a large portion of the women and children, being made captives, were sold and treated as slaves. The services of the temple were interrupted, and its joyful feasts were turned into mourning, 1 Macc. 1:37-39. Soon after this the Jews in general were compelled to eat swine's flesh, and to sacrifice to idols. In December of that same year, the temple was profaned by introducing the statue of Jupiter Olympius; and on the 25th of that month sacrifices were offered to that idol on the altar of Jehovah. Just three years after this last event, namely, December 25, 165 b.c., the temple was expurgated by Judas Maccabeus, and the worship of Jehovah restored.

Thus, three years and a half, or almost exactly this period, passed away, while Antiochus had complete possession and control of everything in and around Jerusalem and the temple. It may be noted, also, that just three years passed, from the time when the profanation of the temple was carried to its greatest height - namely, by sacrificing to the statue of Jupiter Olympius on the altar of Jehovah, down to the time when Judas renewed the regular worship. I mention this last circumstance in order to account for the three years of Antiochus' profanations, which are named as the period of them in Joseptus, Ant. xii. 7, Section 6. This period tallies exactly with the time during which the profanation as consummated was carried on, if we reckon down to the period when the temple worship was restored by Judas Maceabeus. But in Prooem. ad Bell. Jud. Section 7, and Bell. Jude 1. 1, Section 1, Josephus reckons three years and a half as the period during which Antiochus ravaged Jerusalem and Judea."

In regard to this statement, while the general facts are correct, there are some additional statements which should be made, to determine as to its real bearing on the case. The act of detaching Apollonius to attack Jerusalem was not, as is stated in this extract, when Antiochus was on his way to Egypt, but was on his return from Egypt, and was just two years after Jerusalem had been taken by Antiochus. - Prideaux, iii. 239. The occasion of his detaching Apollonius, was that Antiochus was enraged because he had been defeated in Egypt by the Romans, and resolved to vent all his wrath upon the Jews, who at that time had given him no particular offence. When, two years before, Antiochus had himself taken Jerusalem, he killed forty thousand persons; he took as many captives, and sold them for slaves; he forced himself into the temple, and entered the most holy place; he caused a great sow to be offered on the altar of burnt-offering, to show his contempt for the temple and the Jewish religion; he sprinkled the broth over every part of the temple for the purpose of polluting it; he plundered the temple of the altar of incense, the showbread table, and the golden candlestick, and then returned to Antioch, having appointed Philip, a Phrygian, a man of a cruel and barbarous temper, to be governor of the Jews. - Prideaux, iii.231.

When Apollonius again attacked the city, two years afterward, he waited quietly until the Sabbath, and then made his assault. He filled the city with blood, set it on fire, demolished the houses, pulled down the walls, built a strong fortress over against the temple, from which the garrison could fall on all who should attempt to go to worship. From this time, "the temple became deserted, and the daily sacrifices were omitted," until the service was restored by Judas Maccabeus, three years and a half after. The time during which this continued was, in fact, just three years and a half, until Judas MaccaUcus succeeded in expelling the pagan from the temple and from Jerusalem, when the temple was purified, and was solemnly reconsecrated to the worship of God. See Prideaux, Con. iii. 240, 241, and the authorities there cited.

Now, in reference to this interpretation, supposing that the prophecy relates to Antiochus, it must be admitted that there are coincidences which are remarkable, and it is on the ground of these coincidences that the prophecy has been applied to him. These circumstances are such as the following:

(a) The general character of the authority that would exist as denoted by the "little horn," as that of severity and cruelty. None could be better fitted to represent that than the character of Antiochus Epiptianes. Compare Prideaux, Con. iii. 213, 214.

(b) His arrogance and blasphemy - "speaking great words against the Most High." Nothing is easier than to find what would be a fulfillment of this in the character of Antiochus - in his sacrilegious entrance into the most holy places; in his setting up the statue of Jupiter; in his offering a sow as a sacrifice on the great altar; in His sprinkling the broth of swine on the temple in contempt of the Hebrews and their worship, and in his causing the daily sacrifice at the temple to cease.

(c) His making war with the "saints," and "wearing out the saints of the Most High" - all this could be found accomplished in the wars which Antiochus waged against the Jews in the slaughter of so many thousands, and in sending so many into hopeless slavery.

(d) His attempt to "change times and laws" - this could be found to have been fulfilled in the case of Antiochus - in his arbitrary character, and in his interference with the laws of the Hebrews.

(e) The time, as above stated, is the most remarkable coincidence. If this is not to be regarded as referring exclusively to Antiochus, it must be explained on one of two suppositions - either that it is one of those coincidences which will be found to happen in history, as coincidences happen in dreams; or as having a double reference, intended to refer primarily to Antiochus, but in a secondary and more important sense referring also to other events having a strong resemblance to this; or, in other words, that the language was designedly so couched as to relate to two similar classes of events. It is not to be regarded as very remarkable, however, that it is possible to find a fulfillment of these predictions in Antiochus, though it be supposed that the design was to describe the Papacy, for some of the expressions are of so general a character that they could be applied to many events which have occurred, and, from the nature of the case, there were strong points of resemblance between Antiochus and the Papal power. It is not absolutely necessary, therefore, to suppose that this had reference to Antiochus Epiphanes; and there are so many objections to this view as to make it, it seems to me, morally impossible that it should have had such a reference. Among these objections are the following:

(1) This interpretation makes it necessary to divide the kingdom of the Medes and Persians, and to consider them two kingdoms, as Eichhorn, Jahn, Dereser, DeWette, and Bleek do. In order to this interpretation, the following are the kingdoms denoted by the four beasts - by the first, the Chaldee; by the second, the Medish; by the third, the Persian; and by the fourth, the Macedonian, or the Macedonian-Asiatic kingdom under Alexander the Great. But to say nothing now of any other difficulties, it is an insuperable objection to this, that so far as the kingdoms of the Medes and Persians are mentioned in Scripture, and so far as they play any part in the fulfillment of prophecy, they are always mentioned as one. They appear as one; they act as one; they are regarded as one. The kingdom of the Medes does not appear until it is united with that of the Persians, and this remark is of special importance when they are spoken of as succeeding the kingdom of Babylon. The kingdom of the Medes was contemporaneous with that of Babylon; it was the Mede-Persian kingdom that was in any proper sense the successor of that of Babylon, as described in these symbols. The kingdom of the Medes, as Hengstenberg well remarks, could in no sense be said to have succeeded that of Babylon any longer than during the reign of Cyaxares II, after the taking of Babylon: and even during that short period of two years, the government was in fact in the hands of Cyrus. - Die Authentic des Daniel, p. 200. Schlosser (p. 243) says, "the kingdom of the Medes and Persians is to be regarded as in fact one and the same kingdom, only that in the change of the dynasty another branch obtained the authority." See particularly, Rosenmuller, Alterthumskunde, i. 290, 291. These two kingdoms are in fact always blended - their laws, their customs, their religion, and they are mentioned as one. Compare Esther 1:3, Esther 1:18-19; Esther 10:2; Daniel 5:28; Daniel 6:8, Daniel 6:12, Daniel 6:15.

(2) In order to this interpretation, it is necessary to divide the empire founded by Alexander, and instead of regarding it as one, to consider what existed when he reigned as one; and that of Antiochus, one of the successors of Alexander, as another. This opinion is maintained by Bertholdt, who supposes that the first beast represented the Babylonian kingdom; the second, the kingdom of the Medes and Persians; the third, that of Alexander; and the fourth the kingdoms that sprang out of that. In order to this, it is necessary to suppose that the four heads and wings, and the ten horns, equally represent that kingdom, or sprang from it - the four heads, the kingdom when divided at the death of Alexander, and the ten horns, powers that ultimately sprang up from the same dominion. But this is contrary to the whole representation in regard to the Asiatic-Macedonian empire. In Daniel 8:8-9, where there is an undoubted reference to that empire, it is said "the he-goat waxed very great: and when he was strong, the great horn was broken; and for it came up four notable ones toward the four winds of heaven. And out of one of them came forth a little horn, which waxed exceeding great, toward the south, etc." Here is an undoubted allusion to Alexander, and to his followers, and particularly to Antiochus, but no mention of any such division as is necessary to be supposed if the fourth beast represents the power that succeeded Alexander in the East. In no place is the kingdom of the successors of Alexander divided from his in the same sense in which the kingdom of the Medes and Persians is from that of Babylon, or the kingdom of Alexander from that of the Persians. Compare Hengstenberg, as above, pp. 203-205.

(3) The supposition that the fourth beast represents either the kingdom of Alexander, or, according to Bertholdt and others, the successors of Alexander, by no means agrees with the character of that beast as compared with the others. That beast was far more formidable, and more to be dreaded than either of the others. It had iron teeth and brazen claws; it stamped down all before it, and broke all to pieces, and manifestly represented a far more fearful dominion than either of the others. The same is true in regard to the parallel representation in Daniel 2:33, Daniel 2:40, of the fourth kingdom represented by the legs and feet of iron, as more terrific than either of those denoted by the gold, the silver, or the brass. But this representation by no means agrees with the character of the kingdom of either Alexander or his successors, and in fact would not be true of them. It would agree well, as we shall see, with the Roman power, even as contrasted with that of Babylon, Persia, or Macedon; but it is not the representation which would, with propriety, be given of the empire of Alexander, or his successors, as contrasted with those which preceded them. Compare Hengstenberg, as above, pp. 205-207. Moreover, this does not agree with what is expressly said of this power that should succeed that of Alexander, in a passage undoubtedly referring to it, in Daniel 8:22, where it is said, "Now that being broken, whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation, but not in his power."

(4) On this supposition it is impossible to determine who are meant by the "ten horns" of the fourth beast Daniel 7:7, and the "ten kings" Daniel 7:24 that are represented by these. All the statements in Daniel that refer to the Macedonian kingdom Daniel 7:6; Daniel 8:8, Daniel 8:22 imply that the Macedonian empire in the East, when the founder died, would be divided into four great powers or monarchies - in accordance with what is well known to have been the fact. But who are the ten kings or sovereignties that were to exist under this general Macedonian power, on the supposition that the fourth beast represents this? Bertholdt supposes that the ten horns are "ten Syrian kings," and that the eleventh little horn is Antiochus Epiphanes. The names of these kings, according to Bertholdt (pp. 432, 433), are Seleucus Nicator, Antiochus Sorer, Antiochus Theos, Seleucus Callinicus, Seleucus Ceraunus, Antiochus the Great, Seleucus Philopator, Heliodorus, Ptolemy Philometor, and Demetrius. So also Prof. Stuart, Com. on Dan. p. 208. But it is impossible to make out this exact number of Syrian kings from history, to say nothing now of the improbability of supposing that their power was represented by the fourth beast. These kings were not of the same dynasty, of Syria, of Macedonia, or of Egypt, but the list is made up of different kingdoms. Grotius (in loc.) forms the catalogue of ten kings out of the lists of the kings of Syria and Egypt - five out of one, and five out of the other; but this is manifestly contrary to the intention of the prophecy, which is to represent them as springing out of one and the same power. It is a further objection to this view, that these are lists of successive kings - rising up one after the other; whereas the representation of the ten horns would lead us to suppose that they existed simultaneously; or that somehow there were ten powers that sprang out of the one great power represented by the fourth beast.

(5) equally difficult is it, on this supposition, to know who are intended by the "three horns" that were plucked up by the little horn that sprang up among the ten, Daniel 7:8. Grotius, who regards the "little horn" as representing Antiochus Epiphanes, supposes that the three horns were his elder brothers, Seleucus, Demetrius, the son of Seleucus, and Ptolemy Philopator, king of Egypt. But it is an insuperable objection to this that the three kings mentioned by Grotius are not all in his list of ten kings, neither Ptolemy Philometor (if Philometor he meant), nor Demetrius being of the number. - Newton on the Proph. p. 211. Neither were they plucked up by the roots by Antiochus, or by his order. Seieueus was poisoned by his treasurer, Helioderus, whose aim it was to usurp the crown for himself, before Antiochus came from Rome, where he had been detained as a hostage for several years. Demetrius lived to dethrone and murder the son of Antiochus, and succeeded him in the kingdom of Syria. Ptolemy Philopater died king of Egypt almost thirty years before Antiochus came to the throne of Syria; or if Ptolemy Philometer, as is most probable, was meant by Grotius, though he suffered much in the wars with Antiochus, yet he survived him about eighteen years, and died in possession of the crown of Egypt. - Newton, ut supra. Bertlholdt supposes that the three kings were Heliodorus, who poisoned Seleucus Philopater, and sought, by the help of a party, to obtain the throne; Ptolemy Philometor, king of Egypt, who, as sister's son to the king, laid claim to the throne; and Demetrius, who, as son of the former king, was legitimate heir to the throne. But there are two objections to this view;

(a) that the representation by the prophet is of actual kings - which these were not; and

(b) that Antiochus ascended the throne peaceably; Demetrius, who would have been regarded as the king of Syria, not being able to make his title good, was detained as a hostage at Rome. Hengstenberg, pp. 207, 208. Prof Stuart, Com. on Dan., pp. 208, 209, supposes that the three kings referred to were Heliodorus, Ptolemy Philometer, and Demetrius I; but in regard to these it should be observed, that they were mere pretenders to the throne, whereas the text in Daniel supposes that they would be actual kings. Compare Hengstenberg, p. 208.

(6) The time mentioned here, on the supposition that literally three years and a half Daniel 7:25 are intended, does not agree with the actual dominion of Antiochus. In an undoubted reference to him in Daniel 8:13-14, it is said that "the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation," would be "unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed;" that is, one thousand and forty days, or some two years and ten months more than the time mentioned here. I am aware of the difficulty of explaining this (see Prof. Stuart, Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, p. 98, following), and the exact menning of the passage in Daniel 8:13-14, will come up for consideration hereafter; but it is an objection of some force to the application of the "time, and times, and dividing of a time" Daniel 7:25 to Antiochus, that it is not the same time which is applied to him elsewhere.

(7) And, one more objection to this application is, that, in the prophecy, it is said that he who was represented by the "little horn" would continue until "the Ancient of days should sit," and evidently until the kingdom should be taken by the one in the likeness of the Son of man, Daniel 7:9-10, Daniel 7:13-14, Daniel 7:21-22, Daniel 7:26. But if this refers to Antiochus, then these events must refer to the coming of the Messiah, and to the setting up of his kingdom in the world. Yet, as a matter of fact; Antiochus died about 164 years before the Saviour came, and there is no way of showing that he continued until the Messiah came in the flesh.

These objections to the opinion that this refers to Antiochus Epiphanes seem to me to be insuperable.

II. The question whether it refers to the Roman empire and the Papal power. The fair inquiry is, whether the things referred to in the vision actually find such a correspondence in the Roman empire and the Papacy, that they would fairly represent them if the symbols had been made use of after the events occurred. Are they such as we might properly use now as describing the portions of those events that are past, on the supposition that the reference was to those events? To determine this, it will be proper to refer to the things in the symbol, and to inquire whether events corresponding to them have actually occurred in the Roman empire and the Papacy. Recalling the exposition which has been above given of the explanation furnished by the angel to Daniel, the things there referred to will find an ample and a striking fulfillment in the Roman empire and the Papal power.

(1) The fourth kingdom, symbolized by the fourth beast, is accurately represented by the Roman power. This is true in regard to the place which that power would occupy in the history of the world, on the supposition that the first three referred to the Babylonian, the Medo-Persian, and the Macedonian. On this supposition there is no need of regarding the Medo-Persian empire as divided into two, represented by two symbols; or the kingdom founded by Alexander - the Asiatic-Macedonian - as distinct from that of his successors. As the Medo-Persian was in fact one dominion, so was the Macedonian under Alexander, and in the form of the four dynasties into which it was divided on his death, and down to the time when the whole was subverted by the Roman conquests. On this supposition, also, everything in the symbol is fulfilled. The fourth beast - so mighty, so terrific, so powerful, so unlike all the others, armed with iron teeth, and with claws of brass, trampling down and stamping on all the earth - well represents the Roman dominion.

The symbol is such a one as we should now use appropriately to represent that power, and in every respect that empire was well represented by the symbol. It may be added, also, that this supposition corresponds with the obvious interpretation of the parallel place in Daniel 2:33, Daniel 2:40, where the same empire is referred to in the image by the legs and feet of iron. See the note at that passage. It should be added, that this fourth kingdom is to be considered as prolonged through the entire continuance of the Roman power, in the various forms in which that power has been kept up on the earth - alike under the empire, and when broken up into separate sovereignties, and when again concentrated and embodied under the Papacy. That fourth power or dominion was to be continued, according to the prediction here, until the establishment of the kingdom of the saints. Either, then, that kingdom of the saints has come, or has been set up, or the fourth kingdom, in some form, still remains.

The truth is, that in prophecy the entire Roman dominion seems to be contemplated as one - one mighty and formidable power trampling down the liberties of the world; oppressing and persecuting the people of God - the true church; and maintaining an absolute and arbitrary dominion over the souls of men - as a mighty domination standing in the way of the progress of truth, and keeping back the reign of the saints on the earth. In these respects the Papal dominion is, and has been, but a prolongation, in another form, of the influence of pagan Rome, and the entire domination may be represented as one, and might be symbolized by the fourth beast in the vision of Daniel. When that power shall cease, we may, according to the prophecy, look for the time when the "kingdom shall be given to the saints," or when the true kingdom of God shall be set up all over the world.

(2) Out of this one sovereignty, represented by the fourth beast, ten powers or sovereignties, represented by the ten horns, were to arise. It was shown in the exposition, that these would all spring out of that one dominion, and would wield the power that was wielded by that; that is, that the one great power would be broken up and distributed into the number represented by ten. As the horns all appeared at the same time on the beast, and did not spring up after one another, so these powers would be simultaneous, and would not be a mere succession; and as the horns all sprang from the beast, so these powers would all have the same origin, and be a portion of the same one power now divided into many. The question then is, whether the Roman power was in fact distributed into so many sovereignties at any period such as would be represented by the springing up of the little horn - if that refers to the Papacy. Now, one has only to look into any historical work, to see how in fact the Roman power became distributed and broken up in this way into a large number of kingdoms, or comparatively petty sovereignties, occupying the portions of the world once governed by Rome. In the decline of the empire, and as the new power represented by the "little horn" arose, there was a complete breaking up of the one power that was formerly wielded, and a large number of states and kingdoms sprang out of it.

To see that there is no difficulty in making out the number ten, or that some such distribution and breaking up of the one power is naturally suggested, I cast my eye on the historical chart of Lyman, and found the following kingdoms or sovereignties specified as occupying the same territory which was possessed by the Roman empire, and springing from that - namely, the Vandals, Alans, Suevi, Heruli, Franks, Visigoths, Ostrogoths, Burgundians, Lombards, Britons. The Roman empire as such had ceased, and the power was distributed into a large number of comparatively petty sovereignties - well represented at this period by the ten horns on the head of the beast. Even the Romanists themselves admit that the Roman empire was, by means of the incursions of the northern nations, dismembered into ten kingdoms (Calmet on Revelation 13:1; and he refers likewise to Berengaud, Bossuet, and Dupin. See Newton, p. 209); and Machiaveli (Hist. of Flor. 1. i.), with no design of furnishing an illustration of this prophecy, and probably with no recollection of it, has mentioned these names:

1, the Ostrogoths in Moesia;

2, the Visigoths in Pannonia;

3, the Sueves and Alans in Gascoign and Spain;

4, the Vandals in Africa;

5, the Franks in France;

6, the Burgundians in Burgundy;

7, the Heruli and Turingi in Italy;

8, the Saxons and Angles in Britain;

9, the Huns in Hungary;

10, the Lombards at first upon the Danube, afterward in Italy.

The arrangement proposed by Sir Isaac Newton is the following:

1, The kingdom of the Vandals and Alans in Spain and Africa;

2, the kingdom of the Suevians in Spain;

3, the kingdom of the Visigoths;

4, the kingdom of the Alans in Gallia;

5, the kingdom of the Burgundians;

6, the kingdom of the Franks;

7, the kingdom of the Britons;

  1. the kingdom of the Huns;

9, the kingdom of the Lombards;

10, the kingdom of Ravenna.

Compare also Duffield on the Prophecies, pp. 279, 280. For other arrangements constituting the number ten, as embracing the ancient power of the Roman empire, see Newton on the Prophecies, pp. 209, 210. There is some slight variation in the arrangements proposed by Mr. Mede, Bishop Lloyd, and Sir Isaac Newton; but still it is remarkable that it is easy to make out that number with so good a degree of certainty, and particularly so, that it should have been suggested by a Romanist himself. Even if it is not practicable to make out the number with strict exactness, or if all writers do not agree in regard to the dynasties constituting the number ten, we should bear in remembrance the fact that these powers arose in the midst of great confusion; that one kingdom arose and another fell in rapid succession; and that there was not that entire certainty of location and boundary which there is in old and established states. One thing is certain, that there never has been a case in which an empire of vast power has been broken up into small sovereignties, to which this description would so well apply as to the rise of the numerous dynasties in the breaking up of the vast Roman power; and another thing is equally certain, that if we were now to seek an appropriate symbol of the mighty Roman power - of its conquests, and of the extent of its dominion, and of the condition of that empire, about the time that the Papacy arose, we could not find a more striking or appropriate symbol than that of the terrible fourth beast with iron teeth and brazen claws - stamping the earth beneath his feet, and with ten horns springing out of his head.

(3) in the midst of these there sprang up a little horn that had remarkable characteristics. The inquiry now is, if this does not represent Antiochus, whether it finds a proper fulfillment in the Papacy. Now, in regard to this inquiry, the slightest acquaintance with the history and claims of the Papal power will show that there was a striking appropriateness in the symbol - such an appropriateness, that if we desired now to find a symbol that would represent this, we could find no one better adapted to it than that employed by Daniel.

(a) The little horn would spring up among the others, and stand among them - as dividing the power with them, or sharing or wielding that power. That is, on the supposition that it refers to the Papacy, the Papal power would spring out of the Roman empire; would be one of the sovereignties among which that vast power would be divided, and share with the other ten in wielding authority. It would be an eleventh power added to the ten. And who can be ignorant that the Papal power at the beginning, when it first asserted civil authority, sustained just such a relation to the crumbled and divided Roman empire as this? It was just one of the powers into which that vast sovereignty passed.

(b) It would not spring up contemporaneously with them, but would arise in their midst, when they already existed. They are seen in vision as actually existing together, and this new power starts up among them. What could be more strikingly descriptive of the Papacy - as a power arising when the great Roman authority was broken to fragments, and distributed into a large number of sovereignties?. Then this new power was seen to rise - small at first, but gradually gaining strength, until it surpassed any one of them in strength, and assumed a position in the world which no one of them had. The representation is exact. It is not a foreign power that invaded them; it starts up in the midst of them - springing out of the head of the same beast, and constituting a part of the same mighty domination that ruled the world.

(c) It would be small at first, but would soon become so powerful as to pluck up and displace three of the others. And could any symbol have been better chosen to describe the Papal power than this? Could we find any now that would better describe it? Any one needs to have but the slightest acquaintance with the history of the Papal power to know that it was small at its beginnings, and that its ascendency over the world was the consequence of slow but steady growth. Indeed, so feeble was it at its commencement, so undefined were its first appearance and form, that one of the most difficult things in history is to know exactly when it did begin, or to determine the exact date of its origin as a distinct power. Different schemes in the interpretation of prophecy turn wholly on this. We see, indeed, that power subsequently strongly marked in its character, and exerting a mighty influence in the world - having subjugated nations to its control; we see causes for a long time at work tending to this, and can trace their gradual operation in producing it, but the exact period when its dominion began, what was the first characteristic act of the Papacy as such, what constituted its precise beginning as a peculiar power blending and combining a peculiar civil and ecclesiastical authority, no one is able with absolute certainty to determine. Who can fix the exact date? Who can tell precisely when it was? It is true that there were several distinct acts, or the exercise of civil authority, in the early history of the Papacy, but what was the precise beginning of that power no one has been able to determine with so much certainty as to leave no room for doubt. Any one can see with what propriety the commencement of such a power would be designated by a little horn springing up among others.

(d) It would grow to be mighty, for the "little horn" thus grew to be so powerful as to pluck up three of the horns of the beast. Of the growth of the power of the Papacy no one can be ignorant who has any acquaintance with history. It held nations in subjection, and claimed and exercised the right of displacing and distributing crowns as it pleased.

(e) It would subdue "three kings;" that is, three of the ten represented by the ten horns. The prophet saw this at some point in its progress when three fell before it, or were overthrown by it. There might have been also other points in its history when it might have been seen as having overthrown more of them - perhaps the whole ten, but the attention was arrested by the fact that, soon after its rise, three of the ten were seen to fall before it. Now, in regard to the application of this, it may be remarked,

(1) That it does not apply, as already shown, to Antiochus Epiphanes - there being no sense in which he overthrew three of the princes that occupied the throne in the succession from Alexander, to say nothing of the fact that these were contemporaneous kings or kingdoms.

(2) there is no other period in history, and there are no other events to which it could be applied except either to Antiochus or the Papacy.

(3) in the confusion that existed on the breaking up of the Roman empire, and the imperfect accounts of the transactions which occurred in the rise of the Papal power, it would not be wonderful if it should be difficult to find events distinctly recorded that would be in all respects an accurate and absolute fulfillment of the vision.

(4) yet it is possible to make out the fulfillment of this with a good degree of certainty in the history of the Papacy. If applicable to the Papal power, what seems to be demanded is, that three of these ten kingdoms, or sovereignties should be rooted up by that power; that they should cease to exist as separate sovereignties; that they should be added to the sovereignty that should spring up; and that, as distinct kingdoms, they should cease to play a part in the history of the world. The three sovereignties thus transplanted, or rooted up, are supposed by Mr. Mede to have been the Greeks, the Longobards, and the Franks. Sir Isaac Newton supposes they were the Exarchate of Ravenna, the Lombards, and the senate and dukedom of Rome. The objections which may be made to these suppositions may be seen in Newton on the Prophecies, pp. 216, 217. The kingdoms which he supposes are to be referred to were the following:

First. The Exarchate of Ravenna. This of right belonged to the Greek emperors. This was the capital of their dominions in Italy. It revolted at the instigation of the Pope, and was seized by Astolphus, king of the Lombards, who thought to make himself master of Italy. The Pope in his exigency applied for aid to Pepin, king of France, who marched into Italy, besieged the Lombards in Pavia, and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and other territories in Italy. These were not restored to the Greek emperor, as they in justice should have been, but, at the solicitation of the Pope, were given to Peter and his successors for perpetual possession. "And so," says Platina, "the name of the Exarchate, which had continued from the time of Narses to the taking of Ravenna, one hundred and seventy years, was extinguished." - Lives of the Popes. This, according to Sigonius, was effected in the year 755. See Gibbon, Dec. and Fall, vol. ii. 224; iii. 332, 334, 338. From this period, says Bp. Newton, the Popes being now become temporal princes, no longer date their epistles and bulls by the years of the emperor's reign, but by the years of their own advancement to the Papal chair.

Secondly. The kingdom of the Lombards. This kingdom was troublesome to the Popes. The dominions of the Pope were invaded by Desiderius, in the time of Pope Adrian I. Application was again made to the king of France, and Charles the Great, the son and successor of Pepin, invaded the Lombards; and desirous of enlarging his own dominions, conquered the Lombards, put an end to their kingdom, and gave a great part of their territory to the Pope. This was the end of the kingdom of the Lombards, in the 206th year after their obtaining possessions in Italy, and in the year of our Lord 774. See Gibbon, Dec. and Fall, vol. iii.335.

Thirdly. The Roman States subjected to the Popes in a civil sense. Though subjected to the Pope spiritually, yet for a long time the Roman people were governed by a senate, and retained many of their old privileges, and elected both the Western Emperors and the Popes. This power, however, as is well known, passed into the hands of the Popes, and has been retained by them to the present time, the Pope having continued to be the civil as well as the ecclesiastical head. See Bp. Newton, pp. 319, 320. All semblance of the freedom of ancient Rome passed away, and this Roman dominion, as such, ceased to be, being completely absorbed in the Papacy. The Saxons, the Franks, etc., continued their independence as civil powers; these states passed entirely into the dominion of the Pope, and as independent kingdoms or sovereignties ceased to be. This is the solution in regard to the "three horns" that were to be plucked up, as given by Bp. Newton. Absolute certainly in a case of this kind is not to be expected in the confusion and indefiniteness of that portion of history, nor can it be reasonably demanded.

If there were three of these powers planted in regions that became subject to the Papal power, and that disappeared or were absorbed in that one dominion constituting the peculiarity of the Papal dominion, or which entered into the Roman Papal state, considered as a sovereignty by itself among the nations of the earth, this is all that is required. Mr. Faber supposes the three to have been these; the Herulo-Turingic, the Ostrogothic, and the Lombardie, and says of them, that they "were necessarily eradicated in the immediate presence of the Papacy, before which they were geographically standing - and that the temporal principality which bears the name of Peter's patrimony, was carved out of the mass of their subjugated dominions." - Sacred Calendar, vol. ii. p. 102. Prof. Gaussen (Discourse on Popery: Geneva, 1844) supposes that the three kings or kingdoms here referred to were the Heruli, the Ostrogoths, and the Lombards. According to Bower (Lives of the Popes, vol. ii. 108, Dr. Cox's edition, note), the temporal dominions granted by Pepin to the Pope, or of which the Pope became possessed in consequence of the intervention of the kings of France, were the following:

(1) The Exarchate of Ravenna, which comprised, according to Sigonius, the following cities: Ravenna, Bologna, Imola, Fienza, Forlimpoli, Forli, Cesena, Bobbio, Ferrara, Commachio. Adria, Servia, and Secchia

(2) The Pentapolis, comprehending Rimini, Pesaro, Coneha, Fano, Sinigalia, Ancono, Osimo, Umono, Jesi, Fossombrone, Monteferetro, Urbino, Cagli, Lucoli, and Eugubio.

(3) the city and dukedom of Rome, containing several cities of note, which had withdrawn themselves from all subjection to the emperor, had submitted to Peter ever since the time of Pope Gregory II. See also Bower, ii. 134, where he says, "The Pope had, by Charlemagne, been put in possession of the Exarchate, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti" (embracing the city and dukedom of Rome). And again, on the same page (note): "The Pope possessed the Exarchate, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti, with the city and dukedom of Rome." It should be remembered that these statements are made by historians with no reference to any supposed fulfillment of this prophecy, and no allusion to it, but as matters of simple historical fact, occurring in the regular course of history. The material fact to be made out in order to show that this description of the "little horn" is applicable to the Papacy is, that at the - commencement of what was properly the Papacy - that is, as I suppose, the union of the spiritual and temporal power, or the assumption, of temporal authority by him who was Bishop of Rome, and who had been before regarded as a mere spiritual or ecclesiastical ruler, there was a triple jurisdiction assumed or conceded, a threefold domination; or a union under himself of what had been three sovereignties, that now disappeared as independent administrations, and whose distinct governments were now merged in the one single sovereignty of the Pope. Now, that there was, just at this time, or at the beginning of the Papacy, or when it had so increased that it could be recognized as having a place among the temporal sovereignties of the earth, such a united domination, or such a union of three separate powers under one, will be apparent from an extract from Mr. Gibbon. He is speaking of the rewards conferred on the Pope by the Carlovingian race of kings, on account of the favor shown to them in his conferring the crown of France on Pepin, the mayor of the palace - directing in his favor over Childeric, the descendant of Clovis. Of this transaction, Mr. Gibbon observes, in general (iii. 336), that "the mutual obligations of the Popes and the Carlovingian family form the important link of ancient and modern, of civil and ecclesiastical history." He then proceeds

(1) to specify the gifts or favors which the Popes conferred on the Carlovingian race; and

(2) those which, in return, Pepin and Charlemagne bestowed on the Popes. In reference to the latter, he makes the following statement (iii.:338): "The gratitude of the Carlovingians was adequate to these obligations, and their names are consecrated as the saviours and benefactors of the Roman church. Her ancient patrimony of farms and houses was transformed by their bounty into the temporal dominion of cities and provinces, and the donation of the Exarchate was the first-fruits of the conquests of Pepin. Astolphus (king of the Lombards) with a sigh relinquished his prey; the keys and the hostages of the principal cities were delivered to the French ambassador; and in his master's name he presented them before the tomb of Peter. The ample measure of the Exarchate might comprise all the provinces of Italy which had obeyed the emperor or his vicegerent; but its strict and proper limits were included in the territories of Ravenna, Bologna, and Ferrara; its inseparable dependency was the Pentapolis, which stretched along the Adriatic from Rimini to Ancona, and advanced into the midland country as far as the ridge of the Apennines. In this transaction, the ambition and avarice of the Popes have been severely condemned.

Perhaps the humility of a Christian priest should have rejected an earthly kingdom, which it was not easy for him to govern without renouncing the virtues of his profession. Perhaps a faithful subject, or even a generous enemy, would have been less impatient to divide the spoils of the barbarian; and if the emperor had entrusted Stephen to solicit in his name the restitution of the Exarchate, I will not absolve the Pope from the reproach of treachery and falsehood. But, in the rigid interpretation of the laws, every one may accept, without inquiry, whatever his benefactor may bestow without injustice. The Greek emperor had abdicated or forfeited his right to the Exarctiate; and the sword of Astolphus was broken by the stronger sword of the Carlovingian. It was not in the cause of the Iconoclast that Pepin had exposed his person and army in a double expedition beyond the Alps; he possessed, and he might lawfully alienate his conquests: and to the importunities of the Greeks he piously replied, that no human consideration should tempt him to resume the gift which he had conferred on the Roman pontiff for the remission of his sins and the salvation of his soul.

The splendid donation was granted in supreme and absolute dominion, and the world beheld for the first time a Cristian bishop invested with the prerogatives of a temporal prince, the choice of magistrates, the exercise of justice, the imposition of taxes, and the wealth of the palace of Ravenna. In the dissolution of the Lombard kingdom, the inhabitants of the duchy of Spoleti sought a refuge from the storm, shaved their heads after the Ravenna fashion, declared themselves the servants and subjects of Peter, and completed, by this voluntary surrender, the present circle of the Ecclesiastical State." The following things are apparent from this extract:

(a) That here, according to Mr. Gibbon, was the beginning of the temporal power of the Pope.

(b) That this was properly, in the view above taken, the commencement of the Papacy as a distinct and peculiar dominion.

(c) That in this there was a threefold government, or three temporal sovereignties united under him, and constituting at that time, in the language of Mr. Gibbon, "the present circle of the ecclesiastical state." There was, first, the Exarchate of Ravenna; secondly, the Pentapolis, "which," he says, was its inseparable dependency; and, thirdly, the "duchy of Spoleti," which, he says, "completed the present circle of the ecclesiastical state." This was afterward, Mr. Gibbon goes on to say, greatly "enlarged;" but this was the form in which the Papal power first made its appearance among the temporal sovereignties of Europe. I do not find, indeed, that the kingdom of the Lombards was, as is commonly stated, among the number of the temporal sovereignties that became subject to the authority of the Popes, but I do find that there were three distinct temporal sovereignties that lost their independent existence, and that were united under that one temporal authority - constituting by the union of the spiritual and temporal power that one peculiar kingdom. In Lombardy the power remained in the possession of the kings of the Lombards themselves, until that kingdom was subdued by the arms of Pepin and Charlemagne, and then it became subject to the crown of France, though for a time under the nominal reign of its own kings. See Gibbon, iii. 334, 335, 338. If it should be said, that in the interpretation of this passage respecting the "three horns" that were plucked up, or the three kingdoms that were thus destroyed, it would be proper to look for them among the ten, into which the one great kingdom was divided, and that the three above referred to - the Exarchate of Ravenna, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti and Rome - were not properly of that number, according to the list above given, it is necessary, in reply to this, to advert only to the two main facts in the case:

(1) that the great Roman power was actually divided into a large number of sovereignties that sprang up on its ruins - usually, but not in fact exactly, represented by ten; and

(2) that the Papacy began its career with a conceded dominion over the three territories above referred to - a part, in fact, of the one great dominion constituting the Roman power, and in the same territory. It is a remarkable fact that the popes to this day wear a triple crown - a fact that exists in regard to no other monarchs - as if they had absorbed under themselves three separate and distinct sovereignties; or as if they represented three separate forms of dominion. The sum of what is said in the exposition of these verses may be thus expressed:

(1) That there was originally one great sovereignty represented here by the "fourth beast" - the Roman empire.

(2) that, in fact, as is abundantly confirmed by history, this one great and united power was broken up into a large number of separate and independent sovereignties - most naturally and obviously described by ten, or such as would appear in a prophetic vision to be ten, and such as is actually so represented by historians having no interest in the fulfillment of the prophecy, and no designed reference to what may be symbolized by the "ten horns."

(3) that there was another peculiar and distinct power that sprang out of them, and that grew to be mighty - a power unlike the others, and unlike anything that had before appeared in the world - combining qualities to be found in no other sovereignty - having a peculiar relation at the same time to the one original sovereignty, and to the ten into which that was divided - the prolongation, in an important sense, of the power of the one, and springing up in a peculiar manner among the others - that peculiar ecclesiastical and civil power - the Papacy - well represented by the "little horn."

(4) that, in fact, this one power absorbed into itself three of these sovereignties - annihilating them as independent powers, and combining them into one most peculiar dominion - properly represented by "plucking them up."

(5) that as a proper symbol, or emblem of some such domination, a crown or diadem is still worn, most naturally and obviously suggesting such a threefold absorption of dominion.

(6) that all this is actually prefigured by the symbols employed by the prophet, or that the symbols are such as would be naturally employed on the supposition that these events were designed to be referred to.

(7) and that there have been no other historical events to which these remarkable symbols could be naturally and obviously applied. And if these things are so, how are they to be explained except on the supposition that Daniel was inspired? Has man any natural sagacity by which such symbols representing the future could be suggested?

(d) It would be arrogant and proud, "speaking great words against the Most High." No Protestant will doubt that this is true of the Papacy; no one acquainted with history will presume to call it in question. The arrogant pretensions of the Papacy have been manifested in all the history of that power, and no one can doubt that its assumptions have been, in fact, by fair construction, "a speaking of great words against God." The Pope has claimed, or allowed to be conferred on him, names and prerogatives which can belong only to God. See this fully shown in the notes at 2 Thessalonians 2:4. The facts there referred to are all that is necessary to illustrate this passage, on the supposition that it refers to the Papacy. Compare also the Literalist, vol. i. pp. 24-27.

(e) This would be a persecuting power - "making war with the saints," and "wearing out the saints of the Most High." Can anyone doubt that this is true of the Papacy? The Inquisition; the "persecutions of the Waldenses;" the ravages of the Duke of Alva; the fires of Smithfield; the tortures at Goa - indeed, the whole history of the Papacy may be appealed to in proof that this is applicable to that power. If anything could have "worn out the saints of the Most High" - could have cut them off from the earth so that evangelical religion would have become extinct, it would have been the persecutions of the Papal power. In the year 1208, a crusade was proclaimed by Pope Innocent III against the Waldenses and Albigenses, in which a million of men perished. From the beginning of the order of the Jesuits, in the year 1540 to 1580, nine hundred thousand were destroyed. One hundred and fifty thousand perished by the Inquisition in thirty years. In the Low Countries fifty thousand persons were hanged, beheaded, burned, or buried alive, for the crime of heresy, within the space of thirty-eight years from the edict of Charles V, against the Protestants, to the peace of Chateau Cambresis in 1559. Eighteen thousand suffered by the hands of the executioner, in the space of five years and a half, during the administration of the Duke of Alva. Indeed, the slightest acquaintance with the history of the Papacy, will convince anyone that what is here said of "making war with the saints" Daniel 7:21, and "wearing out the saints of the Most High" Daniel 7:25, is strictly applicable to that power, and will accurately describe its history. There have been, indeed, other persecuting powers, but none to which this language would be so applicable, and none which it would so naturally suggest. In proof of this, it is only necessary to refer to the history of the Papacy, and to what it has done to extirpate those who have professed a different faith. Let anyone recall:

(1) the persecution of the Waldenses;

(2) the acts of the Duke of Alva in the Low Countries;

(3) the persecution in England under Mary;

(4) the Inquisition;

(5) the attempts, too successful, to extinguish all the efforts at reformation in Italy and Spain in the time of Luther and Calvin (see McCrie), and

(6) the attempts to put down the Reformation in Germany and Switzerland - all which were either directly originated or sanctioned by the Papacy, and all for the same end, and he will see no reason to doubt that the language here is strictly applicable to that power, and that there has been no government on earth which would be so naturally suggested by it. - Cunninghame, in the Literalist, i. 27, 28. Indeed, who can number up all that have perished in the Inquisition alone?

(h) It would claim legislative power - "thinking to change times and laws." The original Chaldee here may be rendered, as is done by Gesenius and DeWette, set times, stated times, or festival seasons. The word here, says Gesenius (Lexicon), is "spoken of sacred seasons, festivals," and there can be no doubt that in this place it refers to religious institutions. The meaning is, that he would claim control over such institutions or festivals, and that he would appoint or change them at his pleasure. He would abolish or modify existing institutions of that kind, or he would institute new ones, as should seem good to him. This would be applicable, then, to some power that should claim authority to prescribe religious institutions, and to change the laws of God. No one, also, can fail to see a fulfillment of this in the claims of the Papacy, in setting up a jurisdiction over seasons of festival and fast; and in demanding that the laws of kingdoms should be so modelled as to sustain its claims, and modifying the laws of God as revealed in the Bible. The right of deposing and setting up kings; of fixing the boundaries of nations; of giving away crowns and scepters; and of exercising dominion over the sacred seasons, the customs, the amusements of nations - all these, as illustrated under the Papacy, will leave no doubt that all this would find an ample fulfillment in the history of that power. The Pope has claimed to be the head of the church, and has asserted and exercised the right of appointing sacred seasons; of abolishing ancient institutions; of introducing numberless new festival occasions, practically abrogating the laws of God on a great variety of subjects. We need only refer, in illustration of this,

(a) to the claim of infallibility, by which an absolute jurisdiction is asserted that covers the whole ground;

(b) to all the laws pertaining to image-worship, so directly in the face of the laws of God;

(c) to the celibacy of the clergy, rendering void one of the laws of heaven in relation to marriage;

(d) to the whole doctrine respecting purgatory;

(e) to the doctrine of transubstantiation;

(f) to the practical abolition of the Christian Sabbath by appointing numerous saints' days to be observed as equally sacred;

(g) to the law withholding the cup from the laity - contrary to the commandment of the Saviour; and

(h) in general to the absolute control claimed by the Papacy over the whole subject of religion.

Indeed, nothing would better characterize this power than to say that it asserted the right to "change times and laws." And to all this should be added another characteristic Daniel 7:8, that "it would have the eyes of a man;" that is, would be distinguished for a far-seeing sagacity. Could this be so appropriately applied to anything else as to the deep, the artful, and the far-reaching diplomacy of the court of Rome; to the sagacity of the Jesuit; to the skillful policy which subdued the world to itself?

These illustrations will leave no doubt, it seems to me, that all that is here said will find an ample fulfillment in the Papacy, and that it is to be regarded as having a reference to that power. If so, it only remains,

III. To inquire what, according to his interpretation, we are to expect will yet occur, or what light this passage throws on events that are yet future. The origin, the growth, the general character and influence of this power up to a distant period are illustrated by this interpretation. What remains is the inquiry, from the passage before us, how long this is to continue, and what we are to anticipate in regard to its fall. The following points, then, would seem to be clear, on the supposition that this refers to the Papal power:

It is to continue a definite period from its establishment, Daniel 7:25. This duration is mentioned as "a time, and times, and the dividing of a time" - three years and a half - twelve hundred and sixty days - twelve hundred and sixty years. See the note at that verse. The only difficulty in regard to this, if that interpretation is correct, is to determine the time when the Papacy actually began - the terminus a quo - and this has given rise to all the diversity of explanation among Protestants. Assuming any one time as the period when the Papal power arose, as a date from which to calculate, it is easy to compute from that date, and to fix some period - terminus ad quem - to which this refers, and which may be looked to as the time of the overthrow of that power. But there is nothing more difficult in history than the determination of the exact time when the Papacy properly began: that is, when the peculiar domination which is fairly understood by that system commenced in the world; or what were its first distinguishing acts. History has not so marked that period that there is no room for doubt. It has not affixed definite dates to it; and to this day it is not easy to make out the time when that power commenced, or to designate any one event at a certain period that will surely mark it. It seems to have been a gradual growth, and its commencement has not been so definitely characterized as to enable us to demonstrate with absolute certainty the time to which the twelve hundred and sixty years will extend.

Different writers have assigned different periods for the rise of the Papacy, and different acts as the first act of that power; and all the prophecies as to its termination depend on the period which is fixed on as the time of its rise. It is this which has led to so much that is conjectural, and which has been the occasion of so much disappointment, and which throws so much obscurity now over all calculations as to the termination of that power. In nothing is the Scripture more clear than that that power shall be destroyed; and if we could ascertain with exactness the date of its origin, there would be little danger of erring in regard to its close. The different periods which have been fixed on as the date of its rise have been principally the following:

(1) An edict published by Justinian (533 a.d.), and a letter addressed by him at the same time to the Pope, in which he acknowledged him to be the head of the churches, thus conferring on him a title belonging only to the Saviour, and putting himself and empire under the dominion of the bishop of Rome. - Duffield on the Prophecies, p. 281.

(2) The decree of the emperor Phocas (606 a.d.), confirming what had been done by Justinian, and giving his sanction to the code of laws promulgated by him; a code of laws based on the acknowledged supremacy of the Pope, and which became the basis of European legislation for centuries; and conferring on him the title of "Universal Bishop."

(3) The act of Pope Stephen, by which, when appealed to by the claimant to the crown of France, he confirmed Pepin in the kingdom, and set aside Childeric III, and, in return, received from Pepin the Exarchate of Ravenna and the Pentapolis. See Ranke's Hist. of the Papacy, vol. i. 23. This occurred about 752 a.d.

(4) The opinion of Mr. Gibbon (4:363), that Gregory VII was the true founder of the Papal power. "Gregory VII.," says he, "who may be adored or detested as the founder of the Papal monarchy, was driven from Rome, and died in exile at Salerno." Gregory became Pope 1073 a.d. These different dates, if assumed as the foundation of the Papal power, would, by the addition to each of the period of 1260 years, lead respectively to the years 1793, 1866, 2012, and 2333, as the period of the termination of the Papal dominion. As this is a point of great importance in the explanation of the prophecies, it may be proper to examine these opinions a little more in detail. But in order to this, it is necessary to have a clear conception of what the Papacy as a distinct domination is, or what constitutes its peculiarity, as seen by the sacred writers, and as it has in fact existed, and does exist in the world; and in regard to this there can be little difference of opinion.

It is not a mere ecclesiastical power - not a mere spiritual domination - not the control of a bishop as such over a church or a diocese - nor is it a mere temporal dominion, but it is manifestly the union of the two: that peculiar domination which the bishop of Rome has claimed, as growing out of his primacy as the head of the church, and of a temporal power also, asserted at first over a limited jurisdiction, but ultimately, and as a natural consequence, over all other sovereignties, and claiming universal dominion. We shall not find the Papacy, or the Papal dominion as such, clearly, in the mere spiritual rule of the first bishop of Rome, nor in that mere spiritual dominion, however enlarged, but in that junction of the two, when, in virtue of a pretended Divine right, a temporal dominion grew up that ultimately extended itself over Europe, claiming the authority to dispose of crowns; to lay kingdoms under interdict, and to absolve subjects from their allegiance. If we can find the beginning of this claim - the germ of this peculiar kind of domination - we shall doubtless have found the commencement of the Papacy - the terminus a quo - as it was seen by the prophets - the point from which we are to reckon in determining the question of its duration.

With this view, then, of the nature of the Papacy, it is proper to inquire when it commenced, or which of the periods referred to, if either, can be properly regarded as the commencement.

I. The edict of Justinian, and the letter to the bishop of Rome, in which he acknowledged him to be the head of the church, 533 a.d. This occurred under John II, reckoned as the fifty-fifth bishop of Rome. The nature of this application of Justinian to the Pope, and the honor conferred on him, was this: On all occasion of a controversy in the church, on the question whether "one person of the Trinity suffered in the flesh," the monks of Constantinople, fearful of being condemned under an edict of Justinian for heresy in denying this, applied to the Pope to decide the point. Justinian, who took great delight in inquiries of that nature, and who maintained the opposite opinion on that subject, also made his appeal to the Pope. Having, therefore, drawn up a long creed, containing the disputed article among the rest, he despatched two bishops with it to Rome, and laid the whole matter before the Pope. At the same time he wrote a letter to the Pope, congratulating him on his election, assuring him that the faith contained in the confession which he sent him was the faith of the whole Eastern church, and entreating him to declare in his answer that he received to his communion all who professed that faith, and none who did not. To add weight to the letter he accompanied it with a present to Peter, consisting of several chalices and other vessels of gold, enriched with precious stones. From this deference to the Pope, on the part of the emperor, and this submitting to him, as the head of the whole church, of an important question to be determined, it has been argued that this was properly the beginning of the Papacy, and that the twelve hundred and sixty years are to be reckoned from that. But against this opinion the objections are insuperable, for

(a) there was here nothing of what properly constitutes the Papacy - the peculiar union of the temporal and spiritual power; or the peculiar domination which that power has exerted over the world. All that occurred was the mere deference which an emperor showed to one who claimed to be the spiritual head of the church, and who had long before claimed that. There was no change - no beginning, properly so called - no commencement of a new form of domination over mankind, such as the Papacy has been.

(b) But, as a matter of fact, there was, after all, little real deference to the Pope in this case. "Little or no account," says Bower, "ought to be made of that extraordinary deference (the deference shown by carrying this question before the Pope). Justinian paid great deference to the Pope, as well as to all other bishops, when they agreed with him; but none at all when they did not - thinking himself at least as well qualified as the best of them - and so he certainly was - to decide controversies concerning the faith; and we shall soon see him entering the lists with his holiness himself" - Lives of the Popes, i.336.

II. The second date which has been assigned to the origin of the Papacy is the decree made by the emperor Phocas (606 a.d.), by which, it is said, he continued the grant made by Justinian. This act was the following: Boniface III, when he had been made bishop of Rome, relying on the favor and partiality which Phocas had shown him, prevailed on him to revoke the decree settling the title of "Universal Bishop" on the bishop of Constantinople, and obtained another settling that title on himself and his successors. The decree of Phocas, conferring this title, has not indeed come down to us; but it has been the common testimony of historians that such title was conferred. See Mosheim, i. 513; Bower, i. 426. The fact asserted here has been doubted, and Mosheim supposes that it rests on the authority of Baronius. "Still," says he, "it is certain that something of this kind occurred." But there are serious objections to our regarding this as properly the commencement of the Papacy as such. For

(a) this was not the beginning of that peculiar domination, or form of power, which the Pope has asserted and maintained. If this title were conferred, it imparted no new power; it did not change the nature of this domination; it did not, in fact, make the Roman bishop different from what he was before. He was still, in all respects, subject to the civil power of the emperors, and had no control beyond what he exercised in the church.

(b) And even this little was withdrawn by the same authority which granted it - the authority of the emperor of Constantinople - though it has always since been claimed and asserted by the Pope himself. See Bower, i. 427. It is true that, as a consequence of the fact that this title was conferred on the Popes, they began to grasp at power, and aspire to temporal dominion; but still there was no formal grasp of such power growing out of the assumption of this title, nor was any such temporal dominion set up as the immediate result of such a title. The act, therefore, was not sufficiently marked, distinct, and decisive, to constitute an epoch, or the beginning of an era, in the history of the world, and the rise of the Papacy cannot with any propriety be dated from that. This was undoubtedly one of the steps by which that peculiar power rose to its greatness, or which contributed to lay the foundation of its subsequent claims, its arrogance, and its pride; but it is doubtful whether it was so important an event characterizing the Papacy as to be regarded as the origin, or the terminus a quo in ascertaining the time of its continuance.

It was, however, in view of this, and with this considered as properly the origin of the Papacy, that the Rev. Robert Fleming, in his work on the Rise and Fall of the Papacy, first published in 1701, uttered the following remarkable language, as based on his calculations respecting the continuance of that power: "If we may suppose that Antichrist began his reign in the year 606, the additional one thousand two hundred and sixty years of his duration, were they Julian or ordinary years, would lead down to the year 1866, as the last period of the seven-headed monster. But seeing they are prophetic years only (of 360 days), we must cast away eighteen years in order to bring them to the exact measure of time that the Spirit of God designs in this book. And thus the final period of the Papal usurpati (supposing that he did indeed rise in the year 606) must conclude with the year 1848 - (Cobbin's Edition, p. 32.) Whether this be considered as merely a happy conjecture - the one successful one among thousands that have failed, or as the result of a proper calculation respecting the future, no one in comparing it with the events of the year 1848, when the Pope was driven from Rome, and when a popular government was established in the very seat of the Papal power, can fail to see that it is remarkable considered as having been uttered a century and a half ago. Whether it is the correct calculation, and that temporary downfall of the Papal government is to be regarded as the first in a series of events that will ultimately end in its destruction, time must determine. The reasons mentioned above, however, and those which will be suggested in favor of a different beginning of that power, make it, at present, more probable that a different period is to be assigned as its close.

III. The third date which has been assigned as the beginning of the Papacy is the grant of Pepin above referred to, 752 a.d. This grant conferred by Pepin was confirmed also by Charlemagne and his successors, and it was undoubtedly at this period that the Papacy began to assume its place among the sovereignties of Europe. In favor of this opinion - that this was properly the rise of the Papacy - the terminus a quo of prophecy, the following considerations may be urged:

(a) We have here a definite act - an act which is palpable and apparent, as characterizing the progress of this domination over men.

(b) We have here properly the beginning of the temporal dominion, or the first acknowledged exercise of that power in acts of temporal sovereignty - in giving laws, asserting dominion, swaying a temporal scepter, and wearing a temporal crown. All the acts before had been of a spiritual character, and all the deference to the Bishop of Rome had been of a spiritual nature. Henceforward, however, he was acknowledged as a temporal prince, and took his place as such among the crowned heads of Europe.

(c) This is properly the beginning of that mighty domination which the Pope wielded over Europe - a beginning, which, however small at first, ultimately became so powerful and so arrogant as to claim jurisdiction over all the kingdoms of the earth, and the right to absolve subjects from their allegiance, to lay kingdoms under interdict, to dispose of crowns, to order the succession of princes, to tax all people, and to dispose of all newly-discovered countries.

(d) This accords better with the prophecies than any other one event which has occurred in the world - especially with the prophecy of Daniel, of the springing up of the little horn, and the fact that that little horn plucked up three others of the ten into which the fourth kingdom was divided.

(e) And it should be added that this agrees with the idea all along held up in the prophecies, that this would be properly the fourth empire prolonged. The fifth empire or kingdom is to be the reign of the saints, or the reign of righteousness on the earth; the fourth extends down in its influences and power to that. As a matter of fact, this Roman power was thus concentrated in the Papacy. The form was changed, but it was the Roman power that was in the eye of the prophets, and this was contemplated under its various phases, as pagan and nominally Christian, until the reign of the saints should commence, or the kingdom of God should be set up. But it was only in the time of Stephen, and by the act of Pepin and Charlemagne, that this change occurred, or that this dominion of a temporal character was settled in the Papacy - and that the Pope was acknowledged as having this temporal power. This was consummated indeed in Hildebrand, or Gregory VII (Gibbon, iii. 353, iv. 363), but this mighty power properly had its origin in the time of Pepin.

IV. The fourth date assigned for the origin of the Papacy is the time of Hildebrand, or Gregory VII. This is the period assigned by Mr. Gibbon. Respecting this, he remarks (vol. iv. p. 363), "Gregory the Seventh, who may be adored or detested as the founder of the Papal monarchy, was driven from Rome, and died in exile at Salerno." And again (vol. iii. p. 353), he says of Gregory, "After a long series of scandal, the apostolic see was reformed and exalted, by the austerity and zeal of Gregory VII. That ambitious monk devoted his life to the execution of two projects:

I. To fix in the college of Cardinals the freedom and independence of election, and forever to abolish the right or usurpation of the emperors and the Roman people.

II. To bestow and resume the Western Empire as a fief or benefice of the church, and to extend his temporal dominion over the kings and kingdoms of the earth.

After a contest of fifty years, the first of these designs was accomplished by the firm support of the ecclesiastical order, whose liberty was connected with that of the chief. But the second attempt, though it was crowned with some apparent and partial success, has been vigorously resisted by the secular power, and finally extinguished by the improvement of human reason."

If the views above suggested, however, are correct; or if we look at the Papacy as it was in the time of Hildebrand, it must be apparent that this was not the rise or origin of that peculiar domination, but was only the carrying out and completing of the plan laid long before to set up a temporal dominion over mankind.

It should be added, whatever of the three first periods referred to be regarded as the time of the rise of the Papacy, if we add to them the prophetic period of 1260 years, we are now in the midst of scenes on which the prophetic eye rested, and we cannot, as fair interpreters of prophecy, but regard this mighty domination as hastening to its fall. It would seem probable, then, that according to the most obvious explanation of the subject, we are at present not far from the termination and fall of that great power, and that events may be expected to occur at about this period of the world, which will be connected with its fall.

Its power is to be taken away as by a solemn judgment - if the throne was set, and God was to come forth to pronounce judgment on this power to overthrow it, Daniel 7:10-11, Daniel 7:26. This destruction of the power referred to is to be absolute and entire - as if the "beast were slain, and the body given to the burning flame" - "and they shall take away his dominion, to consume and destroy it unto the end." This would denote the absolute destruction of this peculiar power - its entire cessation in the world; that is, the absolute destruction of what had constituted its peculiarity - the prolonged power of the beast of the fourth kingdom - concentrated and embodied in that represented by the little horn. If applied to the Roman power, or the fourth kingdom, it means that that power which would have been prolonged under the dominion of that represented by the little horn, would wholly cease - as if the body of the beast had been burned.

If applied to the power represented by the "little horn" - the Papacy - it means that that power which sprang up amidst the others, and which became so mighty - embodying so much of the power of the beast, would wholly pass away as an ecclesiastico-civil power. It would cease its dominion, and as one of the ruling powers of the earth would disappear. This would be accomplished by some remarkable Divine manifestation - as if God should come in majesty and power to judgment and should pronounce a sentence; that is, the overthrow would be decisive, and as manifestly the result of the Divine interposition as if God should do it by a formal act of judgment. In the overthrow of that power, whenever it occurs, it would be natural, from this prophecy, to anticipate that there would be some scenes of commotion and revolution bearing directly on it, as if God were pronouncing sentence on it; some important changes in the nations that had acknowledged its authority, as if the great Judge of nations were coming forth to assert his own power and his own right to rule, and to dispose of the kingdoms of the earth as he pleased.

(C) It is to be anticipated that the power referred to will be destroyed on account of its pride and arrogance. See the notes at Daniel 7:11. That is, whatever power there is upon the earth at the time referred to that shall be properly that of the fourth beast or kingdom, will be taken away on account of the claims set up and maintained by the "little horn:" "I beheld because of the voice of the great words which the horn spake; I beheld until the beast was slain, etc.," Daniel 7:11. On the supposition that this refers to the Papacy, what is to be expected would be, that the pride and arrogance of that power as such - that is, as an ecclesiastical power claiming dominion over civil things, and wielding civil authority, would be such that the Roman power - the lingering power of the fourth kingdom - would be taken away, and its dominion over the world would cease. That vast Roman domination that once trod down the earth, and that crushed and oppressed the nations, would still linger, like the prolonged life of the beast, until, on account of the arrogance and pride of the Papacy, it would be wholly taken away. If one were to judge of the meaning of this prophecy without attempting to apply it to particular passing events, he would say that it would be fulfilled by some such events as these: if the people over whom the prolonged Roman civil power would be extended, and over whom the ecclesiastical or papal scepter would be swayed, should, on account of the pride and arrogance of the Papacy, rise in their might, and demand liberty - that would be in fact an end of the prolonged power of the fourth beast; and it would be on account of the "great words which the horn spake," and would be in all respects a fulfillment of the language of this prophecy. Whether such an end of this power is to occur, time is to determine.

(D) Simultaneously with this event, as the result of this, we are to anticipate such a spread of truth and righteousness, and such a reign of the saints on the earth, as would be properly symbolized by the coming of the Son of man to the ancient of days to receive the kingdom, Daniel 7:13-14. As shown in the interpretation of those verses, this does not necessarily imply that there would be any visible appearing of the Son of man, or any personal reign (see the note at these verses), but there would be such a making over of the kingdom to the Son of man and to the saints as would be properly symbolized by such a representation. That is, there would be great changes; there would be a rapid progress of the truth; there would be a spread of the gospel; there would be a change in the governments of the world, so that the power would pass into the hands of the righteous, and they would in fact rule. From that time the "saints" would receive the kingdom, and the affairs of the world would be put on a new footing. From that period it might be said that the reign of the saints would commence; that is, there would be such changes in this respect that that would constitute an epoch in the history of the world - the proper beginning of the reign of the saints on the earth - the setting up of the new and final dominion in the world. If there should be such changes - such marked progress - such facilities for the spread of truth - such new methods of propagating it - and such certain success attending it, all opposition giving way, and persecution ceasing, as would properly constitute an epoch or era in the world's history, which would be connected with the conversion of the world to God, this would fairly meet the interpretation of this prophecy; this occurring, all would have taken place which could be fairly shown to be implied in the vision.

(E) We are to expect a reign of righteousness on the earth. On the character of what we are fairly to expect from the words of the prophecy, see the notes at Daniel 7:14. The prophecy authorizes us to anticipate a time when there shall be a general prevalence of true religion; when the power in the world shall be in the hands of good men - of men fearing God; when the Divine laws shall be obeyed - being acknowledged as the laws that are to control men; when the civil institutions of the world shall be pervaded by religion, and moulded by it; when there shall be no hinderance to the free exercise of religion, and when in fact the reigning power on the earth shall be the kingdom which the Messiah shall set up. There is nothing more certain in the future than such a period, and to that all things are tending. Such a period would fulfill all that is fairly implied in this wonderful prophecy, and to that faith and hope should calmly and confidently look forward. For that they who love their God and their race should labor and pray; and by the certain assurance that such a period will come, we should be cheered amidst all the moral darkness that exists in the world, and in all that now discourages us in our endeavors to do good.